JP7448236B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventional gaming machines are generally gaming machines that determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player.

Among these gaming machines, there was one that determined whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and executed an effect according to the determination result ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2018-057968A

However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the game is not very interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can execute a special game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that converts a winning device in which a specific area is provided from a closed state to an open state. , an acquisition means capable of acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition or a second acquisition condition, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the determination means a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of symbols based on the determination result; a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a performance control means capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the specific game can be executed, and the specific game is executed during execution of the specific game. The special game can be executed based on winning of game media in a specific area, and the determining means determines that the special game will be executed with the same probability in the normal game state and the time-saving game state. , the time-saving gaming state includes a first time-saving gaming state in which the first acquisition condition is more likely to be met than the second acquisition condition, and a second time-saving gaming state in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be met than the first acquisition condition. and a third time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state and in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be met than the first acquisition condition, and the game state control The means determines to execute the specific game when the control is in the second time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state when the gaming medium enters the prize in the specific area during execution of the specific game is the normal gaming state. In this case, the second time-saving game state can be controlled for a predetermined period according to the end of the special game executed based on the winning, and the special game is not performed after the end of the second time-saving game state. controllable to the first time-saving game state, it is determined to execute the specific game while being controlled to the second time-saving game state, and the game medium enters a prize in the specific area while the specific game is being executed. If the game state at the time is the time-saving game state, the game can be controlled to the third time-saving game state in response to the end of the special game executed based on the winning.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing initial setting processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a diagram showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a control data determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing small winning game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game. It is a figure which shows the general map general electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the various determination tables used in general electric power supply control processing. It is a figure which shows the operating state of the variable starting part in various time-saving game states. This is a game flow when a jackpot game is executed in a normal game state. This is a game flow when a jackpot game is executed in a time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the production control section. It is a mode flow showing the transition of production modes. It is a mode flow showing the transition of production modes. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing of a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-read continuous performance determination process of a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-read reach performance scenario determination table for losing. It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-read reach effect scenario determination table for jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern judgment table. It is a diagram showing a production pattern related to a pre-read ready-to-read production scenario in which SP ready-to-win production is executed. It is a diagram showing a production pattern related to a pre-read ready-to-reach production scenario in which SPSP ready-to-reach production is executed. It is a diagram showing the relationship between a combination of performance symbols and a skill performance to be executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when two types of skill performances are performed in a fluctuating performance. It is a figure showing example 1 of a performance when a look-ahead reach performance is executed. It is a figure showing example 2 of a performance when a look-ahead reach performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the case of transitioning from a challenge mode to a return home mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in the case of transitioning from a challenge mode to a return home mode. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a jackpot game that shifts to legend mode A is executed. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a small winning game is executed in legend mode A. It is a figure showing the continuation of the production example when a small winning game is executed in the legend mode A. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a small winning game is executed in legend mode B. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the production example when a small winning game is executed in the legend mode B, but there is a puncture.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which game balls (game media) flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a dispensing device 95 (to be described later) dispensing an audio signal based on the establishment of dispensing conditions. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls; A firing operation device 13 that can be operated to fire a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations at the top of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, audio) effects. It looks like this. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality occurs in which the game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIG. 1 or 2 ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a production button 17 that can be set in a normal state and a normal state. an effect button drive device 17b, which includes a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 to a protruding state located above the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 to a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner; Further, a performance button light emitting LED 17c is provided for changing the performance button 17 between an off state and a lighted state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided to enable a player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game balls are rented by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full. During this period, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 4), and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 4) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 (see FIG. 4) for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, and a game board mounting frame 3 and A locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 4) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 4) for driving the firing member, and a firing member that slopes upward from the firing member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper are provided for stopping the game ball at a shooting position that is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 4) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a where a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a shooting ball guide path 38 is formed that guides the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 called a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and this decorative frame 40 allows the game area 5a to fire with a first firing force. The game area is divided into a left side gaming area where the game ball fired flows down, and a right side gaming area where the game ball fired with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down, and the left side gaming area and the right side gaming area. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to warp the game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are three general prize winning holes 43 spaced apart from each other, in which game balls can always be entered. One general winning hole 43 is provided in which a ball can always be won. When a game ball that has won (entered) the general winning hole 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls ( Game media) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (giving a prize value).

Below the stage part 42, a first starting hole A45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) where a game ball can always win (entering) is provided. When a game ball played (ball) is detected by the first starting port A detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are sent to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). ) is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (awarded with prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

On the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game ball is not awarded a prize (ball entered) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the first starting port operating piece 48f is pressed by the game ball as the auxiliary game described later is executed). A first variable starting section 46A is provided which converts a closed state in which it is possible (difficult) to enter an open state in which it is possible (easily) to win a game ball, and also changes from the open state to the closed state when one game ball wins. It is being

The first variable starting part 46A has a first starting opening B46 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which a game ball can be won, and a lower part is pivotally supported on the left side of the first starting opening B46, so that the upper part can be moved left and right. A first starting port opening/closing member 46b in the shape of a blade that can be opened and closed in the direction, and a first starting port B detection switch 46a (see FIG. 4) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the first starting port B46. It is provided.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port B46 and is detected by the first starting port B detection switch 46a (see FIG. 4) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls ( For example, three balls) are dispensed from the dispensing device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (applying prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and below the first variable starting section 46A, a predetermined condition is established (the second starting port operating piece 48g is pressed by the game ball as the auxiliary game described later is executed). Based on this, the closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to win (balls entered) is converted to the open state in which it is possible (easy) to win the game ball, and when one game ball enters the prize, the open state is changed to the closed state. A second variable starting section 47A is provided.

The second variable starting part 47A has a second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) in which a game ball can be won, and a lower part is pivotally supported on the left side of the second starting opening 47, so that the upper part can be rotated from left to right. A second starting port opening/closing member 47b in the form of a blade that can be opened and closed in a direction, and a second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 are provided. It is being

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 2 balls) are dispensed from the dispensing device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (giving prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

At the lower left of the second variable starting section 47A, a general game gate 44 (general game starting area) through which a game ball can always pass is provided. When detected, a prize ball is not awarded, but to perform an auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that makes it easier for game balls to enter the first starting port B46 or the second starting port 47. The right is granted (Fuzu identification information, which will be described later, is stored). In addition, if the game ball passes while the conditions for executing the jackpot game are satisfied, the execution condition for executing the round game multiple times is established (activation of the accessory continuous operation device). It has also become

Below the second variable starting section 47A and on the lower right side of the general game gate 44, a first variable starting section 46A or a second variable starting section 47A is provided that utilizes the weight of the game ball that has entered (entered) the inside. A conversion mechanism section 48 is provided for converting the closed state to the open state.

The conversion mechanism section 48 includes an upper channel 48a, a left channel 48b branching to the left from a branch located at the lower end of the upper channel 48a, a right channel 48c branching to the right from the branch, and an upper channel 48a. An inlet opening/closing member 48d that opens and closes the inlet (introduction opening) of 48a, an inlet opening/closing solenoid 48h (see FIG. 4) for converting the inlet opening/closing member 48d between the closed state and the open state, and the left side located at the branching part. A channel switching member 48e that distributes game balls to one of the channel 48b and the right channel 48c, a first state in which the channel switching member 48e distributes game balls to the left channel 48b, and a first state that distributes game balls to the right channel 48c. A distribution flow path switching solenoid 48i (see FIG. 4) for converting to the second state of distribution, a first starting port operating piece 48f that is pressed by the game ball flowing into the left flow path 48b, and a right flow path 48c. A second starting port operating piece 48g that is pressed by the game balls that have flowed in is provided.

Then, with the execution of the auxiliary game, the entrance opening/closing member 48d is converted to the open state, and the game ball guided into the conversion mechanism section 48 from the entrance (introduction opening) of the upper channel 48a is branched by the entrance opening/closing member 48d. When the ball reaches the left channel 48b or the right channel 48c by the channel switching member 48e. After that, when the first starting port operating piece 48f is pressed by the game balls distributed to the left channel 48b, the first starting port opening/closing member 46b of the first variable starting section 46A is brought into the open state via a link mechanism (not shown). On the other hand, when the second starting port operating piece 48g is pressed by the game balls distributed to the right flow path 48c, the second starting port opening/closing member of the second variable starting section 47A is activated via a link mechanism (not shown). 47b is converted into an open state.

On the left side of the conversion mechanism section 48, there is a switch that changes from a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined to be a small hit) to an open state in which it is possible to win a prize (easy). A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device) has a top surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for the game ball, and a first large part that is movable in the front-back direction. A winning opening/closing member 51, a first winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first winning opening/closing member 51, and a game in which a winning (ball) is won in the first winning opening 50. The first big winning opening 50 is closed by moving the first big winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 4) that detects the ball and the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position). At the same time, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 50b ( (see FIG. 4).

Also, inside the first big prize opening 50, a specific area opening/closing member 52 whose upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) serves as a flow path for the game ball, and which is movable in the front-back direction. , a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, a specific area detection switch 53a (see FIG. 4) that detects a game ball that has flowed into (entered) the specific area 53, and a specific area detection switch 53a (see FIG. 4). By moving the opening/closing member 52 toward the front (winning restriction position), the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state, and by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 toward the rear (winning permitting position), the specific area 53 is changed to a closed state. A flow path switching solenoid 52b (see FIG. 4) for converting to the open state and a discharge port 54 through which game balls that have not flowed into the specific area 53 flow are provided, and game balls that have flowed into the discharge port 54 is detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 50a.

Then, when the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during a small winning game to be described later, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 When a game ball that has been flowing down the top surface or a game ball that has reached the first big winning hole 50 enters the first big winning hole 50 and this game ball is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined A certain number of game balls (for example, 10) are put out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

Then, when a game ball passes (enters) a specific area 53 that is in an open state during a small winning game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11, and after the small winning game ends, a jackpot game to be described later is executed.

In addition, without providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a is set as the specific area, and the first large winning hole is opened during the small winning game described later. A jackpot game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small jackpot game ends by detecting the game ball that has flowed into the jackpot by the first jackpot detection switch 50a.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game and a small win game that change the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but when a jackpot game is treated as a special game and a small win game is treated as a specific game. There is.

At the lower left of the first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device), a game is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot has been determined, a game ball has entered a specific area 53 during a small winning game). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) is provided which can convert from a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a ball to an open state in which it is possible (easily) to win a ball.

The second variable winning part 55 (first variable winning device) has a top surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to serve as a flow path for the game ball, and a second variable winning part 55 (first variable winning device) that is movable in the front-back direction. The winning opening/closing member 57, the second grand winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second grand winning opening/closing member 57, and the game in which a prize (ball) is won in the second grand winning opening 56. The second big winning opening 56 is closed by moving the second big winning opening detection switch 56a (see FIG. 4) that detects the ball and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 toward the front (winning regulation position). At the same time, the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 56b ( (see FIG. 4).

Then, when the second big prize opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening/closing member 57 flows down. When a game ball that has been playing or a game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56 and this game ball is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Balls (for example, 10 game balls) are put out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, the game ball launched into the left side game area flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 as it is, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down via the stage part 42, and is placed below the decorative frame 40. The winnings will be won in any of the four general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening A45, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, the normal figure gate 44 provided in the right side game area, the first variable starting part 46A (first starting port B46), the second variable starting part 47A (second starting port 46), the first variable winning part 49 (first There is no chance of winning (passing through) the grand prize opening 50) or the second variable winning section 55 (second grand prize opening 56).

In addition, the game ball launched into the right side game area is the first variable starting part 46A (first starting port B46), the second variable starting part 47A (second starting port 47), the general gate 44, the first variable winning prize (first grand prize opening 50), second variable winning section (second grand prize opening 56), and general winning opening 43 provided in the right side gaming area, or enter the out opening 39. Therefore, no prizes will be won in the general winning hole 43 and the first starting hole A45 provided in the left side gaming area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are game balls that have won the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole A45, the first starting hole B46, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, and the second big winning hole 56, Further, an out ball flow path is provided that receives and collects out balls made of game balls that have flowed into the out port 39, and allows them to flow down while being collected, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 4) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. is provided. The game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there is a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, and a second special symbol reservation. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display 60 is for displaying (notifying) the result of jackpot determination of the first special symbol based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46. The second special symbol display device 61 displays (informs) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol, which is performed based on the passing (entering ball) of the game ball to the regular symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

Jackpot determination means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole A45, the first starting hole B46, or the second starting hole 47, special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, special symbol determination To obtain random numbers, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) and determine whether to execute a jackpot game or a small win game based on the acquired special symbol determination information. Applies to.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Afterwards, a stop display of the first special symbol to notify the determination result is performed. Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 each include a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, small win mode, loss mode).

Note that in this embodiment, a "big hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination. "Jackpot game" means a round game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) is changed from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 10 times) with an interval in between. This refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in which it is easy for the player to win prize balls.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the big prize opening. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

Furthermore, "small win" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a small win game (specific game) in the jackpot determination. A "small winning game" is a game in which a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50) is changed from a closed state to an open state in a manner more disadvantageous than in a jackpot game can easily win prize balls. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the big prize opening in small winning games is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, the predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening. When (for example, 10 balls) wins (balls entered), the small winning game ends.

The auxiliary game judgment is based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal pattern judgment, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.). This corresponds to acquiring the information and determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired common figure determination information. Note that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays a normal symbol in a fluctuating manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol to notify the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the auxiliary game determination (win mode or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) in auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" refers to the first variable starting part 46A (first starting port B46) and the second variable starting part 46A (first starting port B46) and the second variable starting part 46A (first starting port B46) due to the entrance opening/closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism part 48 being converted to the open state in a predetermined manner. It refers to a gaming state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the part 47A (second starting port 47).

Although the maximum number of operations and the maximum operation time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before the maximum number of operations and the maximum operation time are reached, the first starting port B46 and When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second starting port 47, the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a gaming state in which the game ball is likely to win in the first starting port B46 or the second starting port 47 (the starting condition for the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is likely to be satisfied). It has become. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided which have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the special symbol determination information (the first This is for displaying the first pending number (U1), which is the number of pending memories), and lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of first pending memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is determined by the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation memory) that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservation memories. Although up to four second reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four, or the second reservation memory may not be stored.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and indicates the number of normal drawing determination information (normal drawing holding memory) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal drawing gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and it lights up or blinks in a manner to indicate the number of ordinary figures held in memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures pending memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four, or no ordinary figures pending memory may be stored.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if it is determined to be a big hit, numbers such as "3" or "7" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if it is determined to be a small win, alphabets such as "A" or "C" will be displayed. If the display is stopped and it is determined that the game has lost, a "-" symbol may be displayed as a stop display, and during a fluctuating display, the lights may be turned off and the "-" symbol may be repeated.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. The LED starts lighting up, continues to light up during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED when the jackpot game ends. For example, if it is a jackpot game with two rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with ten rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that encourages firing the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting) during a jackpot state (special game) or time-saving game state. The LED is turned off during the normal game state and turned on during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is used to indicate that the setting is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later. starts lighting up, and turns off the LED when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. Note that the status confirmation display 68 may be installed at the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and may be installed at other locations.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided at the bottom of the production space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable performance device 73 for executing motion performance is provided, and a variable notification LED 59 for reporting the variable display state of the special symbol is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol variable display is not being performed, a variable performance that involves the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ that is performed while the special symbol variable display is being executed, There is a jackpot effect etc. that is performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable effect, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, etc. It becomes.

Specifically, the vertical direction is between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a presentation position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (ascending, descending). Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and a variable display area for executing variable effects. A mode display area indicating the production mode related to the above is formed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbol, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, as the effect pattern 70a, a pattern indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode, small win mode). The jackpot mode and the small win mode are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is other modes.

The manner in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is by scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may also be scrolling in the horizontal direction, switching on the spot, rotating (rotating), etc. good.

Also, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device depending on the result of the jackpot determination. 71 is designed to increase the player's expectation that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

The first image display device 70 starts a variable display in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60, and starts a variable display in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. The variable display is started in response to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the first special symbol display area for displaying the first special symbol TZ1 that is to be stopped and the second special symbol display 61. However, a second special symbol display area is formed for displaying a second special symbol TZ2 that is stopped and displayed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol.

The first image display device 70 also includes a first pending icon display area for displaying a number of first pending icons (first pending information) corresponding to a first pending number (U1) in a normal gaming state to be described later. 70B, a second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2) in a time-saving gaming state to be described later, and a second pending icon display area 70D during execution of a variable effect. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that the icon is the first pending number (U1), the first pending number display area 70E for numerically displaying the first pending number (U1), and the second pending number (U1). A second reservation number display area 70F for numerically displaying U2) is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes, from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area). , a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area), and a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to fourth display section 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display section 70B2 displays the second pending icon. A first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display section 70B3. A first pending icon indicating pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon indicating first pending memory in which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left side, a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 ( The number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4.

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. A second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the third display section 70D3, and a second pending icon in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed thirdly is displayed. A second pending icon indicating pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and is arranged so that it does not rest on or float on the pedestal image. The icon will be displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (production symbol 70a), the first pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70C. The first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70C, and the first special symbol (production symbol 70a) is displayed in a variable manner. The icon disappears (erases) when the process ends.

In addition, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (production symbol 70a), the second pending icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C. ), the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the effect symbols 70a in a variable manner, but either one or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 The effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are movable while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable display of the performance symbol 70a. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined motion, it is possible to perform motion effects. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel illumination device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (above) of the first image display device 70 and near the center (downward) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (raise, descend) between the production position (second position) and the current performance position (second position). The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The fluctuation notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED, and includes a first fluctuation notification LED 59a (left side in FIG. 1) corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second fluctuation notification LED 59b (right side in FIG. 1) corresponding to the second special symbol. is provided. The first fluctuation notification LED 59a starts changing color (fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern) in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and changes color in response to stopping the variable display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed. The second fluctuation notification LED 59b starts changing the color (fluctuation display of the second lamp pattern) in response to the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and changes color in response to the stop of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (fluctuation display of the second lamp symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed.

In addition, the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the statically displayed performance pattern 70a and the first lamp pattern, and the combination of the statically displayed performance pattern 70a and the second lamp pattern The result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the second special symbol may be notified. In addition, the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified only by the first lamp symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the second special symbol is notified only by the second lamp symbol that is stopped and displayed. The results may be announced.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 95 for paying out game balls (game media) based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), island equipment, etc. A game ball storage section 96 that stores supplied game balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A with a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A with a built-in payout control board 120, and an effect control board. A production control device 130A with a built-in power supply board 160, a power supply device 160A with a built-in power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc. are provided. It is being

In addition, an opening/closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. In addition, the production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74). A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching an adjustment mode related to adjustment of the amount of light.

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m that has a main control unit 110m for clearing the stored contents or for determining the level of advantage of the game (jackpot determination). The RWM clear switch 111a inputs a signal to update the set value (probability of determining a jackpot), and inputs a signal to shift to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute a setting. Numerical segments are configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values and performance information.

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be explained using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operations), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of payout control commands from the main control board 110. A board 120, a production control board 130 that controls production related to the game based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the production control board 130. It is equipped with 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to send and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is controlled by the production control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted only in one direction to the board 130.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports. It has a length of 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening A detection switch 45a, a first starting opening B detection switch 46a, and a second starting opening. Port detection switch 47a, inlet opening/closing solenoid 48h, distribution flow path switching solenoid 48i, first big winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 50b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, second large Winning hole detection switch 56a, second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 56b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special Symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to games while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. This enables control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and control processing for sending and receiving various control commands. Control processing and control processing for transmitting gaming information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the gaming information output terminal board 90 are performed.

"Game information" includes the starting hole winning signal, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol that is output every time a game ball wins in the first starting hole A45, the first starting hole B46, or the second starting hole 47. A symbol confirmation signal that is output every time the fluctuating display of symbols is stopped, a jackpot signal that is output during a jackpot game, an open signal that is output during a round game (opening of the jackpot opening), which will be described later. Examples include a time-saving state signal that is output during a time-saving gaming state, and a security signal that is output when a situation that threatens the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.) occurs.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls put out from the payout device 95, and a putout ball detection switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage section 96 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows control processing to pay out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing to send a command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, etc. (not shown).
The ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input/output port of the firing control section 122.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized, and fires the ball. When a change in the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is activated so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to fire game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The production control board 130 includes a production control unit 130m that collectively controls the progress of production based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a production control unit 130m that controls image display and other operations based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. It is equipped with

The production control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b in which a production control program is stored, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

A production button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the production control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the production mode of the variable production, control processing for transmitting production control commands based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, and causes the audio output device 9 to display a predetermined sound. and control the output of sounds.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame lighting device 10, the production button drive device 17b (production button drive motor, production button vibration motor), production button light emitting LED 17c, starting port lamp 75, movable production device 73, and the board. A lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Thereby, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the production button driving device 17b, the production button light emitting LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable production device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (equivalent to power supply means). The power supply board 160 has a power supply board that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has decreased (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the decrease in power supply voltage (the occurrence of a power outage). It includes a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, one week).

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage), and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (power outage). Can be done.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and the production control board 120 and the production control unit 130m are provided so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage). Backup power may be supplied to the production control unit 130m. Further, backup power may be supplied only to either one of the payout control board 120 and the production control unit 130m.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, "normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)" and "time-saving gaming state" are used as states related to the ease of winning a game ball into various starting ports (first starting port B46, second starting port 47). "state".

Note that the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "normal gaming state." Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" means that in the auxiliary game determination that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the probability of being determined to be a hit is 255/256. Therefore, the average time of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is set to about 1.5 seconds, and the operating time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism section 48 to the open state in the case of winning is set to 0.32 seconds. Refers to the game state that is set.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" includes "first time-saving gaming state", "second time-saving gaming state", "third time-saving gaming state", and "fourth time-saving gaming state", and it is determined that it is a win. The probability that the probability of the change is 255/256, the average time of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is set to about 0.1 seconds, and the entrance opening/closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism section 48 is in the open state when it is determined to be a hit. By setting the operation time to 0.8 seconds or more, the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the normal gaming state, and the game balls are inserted into the various starting ports (first starting port B46, second starting port 47). is a gaming state that is advantageous to players who are likely to win.

The "first time saving game state" is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), and the second This is a game state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the starting hole 47 (a special 2nd time reduction in which the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal game state).

In the "second time saving game state", the number of times the loss variation display of the special symbol executed after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0) is the predetermined number of times (this embodiment 600 times), the game state is controlled (without going through the jackpot game) and the game ball is more likely to win in the first starting port B46 than in the first starting port A45 or the second starting port 47. (Special 1 time saving in which the variable display of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal game state).

The "third time saving game state" is controlled after the jackpot game ends (via the jackpot game), and the game ball is placed in the first starting port B46 rather than in the first starting port A45 or the second starting port 47. This is a gaming state in which it is easier to win a prize (a special 1 time saving mode in which the variable display of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal gaming state).

The "4th time-saving game state" is controlled (without going through the jackpot game) when a special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the special symbol change display after winning a special loss in the jackpot determination. A gaming state in which it is easier for a game ball to win in the first starting port B46 than in the first starting port A45 or the second starting port 47 (special 1 time saving in which the variable display of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal gaming state) It is.

In addition, the "time-saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "normal game state" in terms of the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation time when the entrance opening/closing member 48d is in the open state, but it is determined that it is a hit. It may be set so that only one of the probability that the symbol will be opened, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation time that the entrance opening/closing member 48d is in the open state is advantageous.

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) shows a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (enters a ball) in the first starting port A45 and/or the second starting port 47 is stored. FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage section of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. 5(c) is a diagram showing the determination information storage area. FIG. This is the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 5(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage part of the ordinary figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the special figure determination information storage area is a first area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46 is stored. A special figure determination information retention storage area, a second special figure determination information retention storage area in which special figure determination information obtained based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and It is divided into a special figure judgment information storage area in which special figure judgment information is stored, and the first special figure judgment information holding storage area and the second special figure judgment information holding storage area are respectively divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section. It is divided into sections.

In addition, the first storage part, the second storage part, the third storage part, and the fourth storage part of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display part 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the section 70B2, the third display section 70B3, and the fourth display section 70B4, respectively. In addition, the first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section, and the fourth storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2, and the second storage icon display area 70D. They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of pieces of special figure determination information (reservation memory, reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first reservation number (U1), and these special figures A number of first pending icons corresponding to the determination information are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of pieces of special figure determination information (reservation memory, reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information becomes the second reservation number (U2), and corresponds to these determination information. The number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold icons will be displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information (execution information) stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), each storage unit includes a random number storage area for jackpot determination for storing a random number value for determining a jackpot, and a random number storage area for special symbol determination for storing a random number value for special symbol determination. area, a random number storage area for reach determination for storing the random number value for reach determination, and a random number storage area for special figure fluctuation pattern determination for storing the random number value for determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port A45 or the first starting port B46 and the special pattern judgment information is acquired, the special pattern judgment information is stored in the first special pattern judgment information reservation storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number in which no information is stored. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest numbered one in which no special figure determination information is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, stores the special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to in order to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is shifted. will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 5(c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes the normal figure determination information storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44 is stored, and the normal figure determination information storage area The ordinary figure determination information storage area is divided into the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information that is being displayed is stored, and the ordinary figure determination information holding storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, respectively. Note that the number of pieces of ordinary figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the ordinary figure determination information reservation storage area becomes the ordinary figure reservation number.

As shown in FIG. 5(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing random number values for hit determination, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing random number values for normal symbol determination. and a random number storage area for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern for storing random numbers for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information is acquired, it is acquired in the lowest numbered storage section in which normal pattern judgment information is not stored in the normal pattern judgment information storage area. The normal figure determination information is stored.

In the 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of normal symbols is met, the normal pattern judgment information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information retention storage area is shifted. and will be referenced to execute the fluctuating display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 6. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, and a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming set values based on setting confirmation operations, drive source initial operation processing for initially operating various drive sources (various solenoids) provided in panel unit 500, etc. are performed. Note that details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for reach determination, and in step S51, updates the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, Update the initial random value for determining normal symbols.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process moves to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process moves to step S54. If the input does not continue for the predetermined period, there is a possibility of an instantaneous power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily. Assuming that there is a difference, the process moves to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power-off designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify that power-off processing has started. Send. As a result, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power-off designation command.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process moves to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for waiting for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, it is assumed that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be established, and the process moves to step S58.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining number of payouts specification command is received, the remaining number of payouts specified by the remaining number of payouts specification command is saved, and if the remaining number of payouts specification command is not received, the remaining number of payouts is saved. Save “0” as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here will be referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command to specify the number of payouts in accordance with the remaining number of payouts will be sent to the payout control board 120. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the main RAM 110c is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access, and from then on, power supply is disabled. Wait until it is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but in the event of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed. This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step S12, and performs startup wait processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game ball.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power is being restored and the process moves to step S17. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process is transferred to step S17. The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power cut during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S19 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value, which is the stage of the advantage level of the game (probability of being judged as a jackpot in jackpot judgment), is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs processing to confirm the setting value. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S24.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S20. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S22. move.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, the checksum is determined to be abnormal, as this is due to the first power-on or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. will be moved.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S22. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to issue an unrecoverable error notification indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a display of an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 displays an unrecoverable error message indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred. This means outputting an error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be performed and the process moves to step S24, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game (initialize the area other than the set value area of the main RAM 110c).

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S25. Specifically, processing is performed to initially operate various drive sources (various solenoids) provided in the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses over a predetermined period of time.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") when the power is turned on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame The lighting device 10 for the board and the lighting device 74 for the panel are fully lit in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, processing is performed to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the main RAM 110c on the information display 113, and to finish checking the setting values by operating the setting key switch 112a. .

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S29. Specifically, processing is performed to initially operate the various drive sources (various solenoids) described above for a predetermined period of time. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to terminate the setting confirmation notification and the like and execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, or The lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power outage). This means outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command, which will be described later) to the production control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S33. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, controls the progress of the game (main control) by allowing all interrupts. A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initial setting process is ended.

In other words, from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is finished, the game is in a pre-start state before the game progress control starts, and after the initial setting process is finished, the game progress control is stopped. The game becomes ready for play.

In this way, while changing settings (during setting change mode) or checking settings (during setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, the status confirmation display 68, first image display device 70, second It is possible to recognize that settings are being changed by checking the image display device 71, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 74, and on the back (back side), by checking the information display 113, settings can be changed. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent with information indicating the current gaming state, but after sending the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

Furthermore, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting change flag, it may be possible to prevent unrecoverable error processing from being performed even if the previous power-off occurred while the settings were being changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt processing, after the initialization processing of the main processing is completed, a clock pulse is input at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110. This is executed by controlling the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area in step S100, and performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

The main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random values, special pattern fluctuation pattern determination random values, hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination random values are updated. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1 to them. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, processing is performed to update the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening A detection switch 45a, the first starting opening B detection switch 46a, the second It is determined whether there is an input to various switches such as the starting port detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the specific area detection switch 53a, etc., and if there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data. Note that details of the input control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing in step S300. Specifically, the determination of the special pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port A45, the first starting port B46, or the second starting port 47, and the determination of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Processes such as variable display, opening/closing of the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 50, second grand prize opening 56), and setting of the gaming state are performed. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs general electric power control processing in step S400. Specifically, the determination of the obtained normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, the fluctuation display of the normal pattern, the opening/closing of the entrance opening/closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism section 48 (auxiliary game), etc. Perform processing. Note that details of the general electric power control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole A45, first starting hole B46, second starting hole 47, first large winning hole A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56 to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process in step S600. Specifically, various errors (such as a game ball entering the first starting hole B46 or the second starting hole 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole when not in the jackpot game) Unauthorized prize winning error in which a game ball enters the opening 56, abnormal prize winning error in which the number of game balls entered into various prize openings and the number of game balls discharged from the prize ball flow path through which winning balls flow down, magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, a radio wave error detects an abnormal radio wave for a predetermined period of time by the radio wave detection sensor 58a, and a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state. , while the progress of the game is being controlled, the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated (an operation error) is determined to occur, and the error specifying command corresponding to the error that has occurred is controlled. Processing for transmitting to the board 130 is performed. As a result, the production control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

Main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the operation data output to the inlet opening/closing solenoid 48h, the distribution channel switching solenoid 48i, the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 50b, the channel switching solenoid 52b, the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 56b, etc., the first special Special symbol pending display data output to symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display Processing for creating display data etc. to be output to the PC 65 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing in step S720. Specifically, processing for creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, port output processing that outputs signals such as the operation data and display data created in step S700, and outputs signals such as game information data created in step S720, and the payout control board 120 Send a payout status confirmation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status, or refer to prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) to be described later. , performs processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the main RAM 110c, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, starting hole, big winning hole) during normal gaming state, To count gaming performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the gaming state. Process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming performance information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed. By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value (the calculation formula is (Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base memory set in the main RAM 110c is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of the area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area is provided for the game, and the normal base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the main RAM 110c, permit interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode) before the start of game progress control, so the payout Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and the system is used to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, the detection signal is inputted from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56. It is determined whether or not the ball has been played, and processing for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port A detection switch 45a or the first starting port B detection switch 46a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port A45 or the first starting port B46. It is determined whether or not, and a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed, and a process for acquiring and storing special figure determination information is performed. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the second starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it is a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing normal pattern determination information. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing in step S260, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and predetermined data is set. Note that details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port A detection switch 45a or the first starting port B detection switch 46a is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port A detection switch 45a or the first starting port B detection switch 46a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and the first starting port A detection switch 45a or the first starting port B detection switch 45a or the first starting port B detection switch 45a is input. If the detection signal from the B detection switch 46a is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for 3-prize balls by adding data indicating 3-prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-4. If the first pending number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first pending number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first pending number (U1) is updated. A corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S230-3 in the vacant storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current state is a normal gaming state or a special 1 time saving game state (second to fourth time saving gaming states). When in the normal gaming state or the special 1 time saving game state (2nd to 4th time saving gaming state), pre-read processing of the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port A45 is performed. The process moves to step S230-9, and if it is not in the normal gaming state or the special 1 time saving (second to fourth time saving gaming states) (if it is in the special 2 working time saving (first time saving gaming state)), the first The current first starting port detection switch input process is terminated by assuming that the pre-reading process (prior judgment) of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port A45 or the first starting port B46 is not performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first prefetch process (prior determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIG. 21(a) or FIG. 21(d)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure judgment information is selected, and the special figure judgment information acquired this time is used as the first pre-reading process. 1. Before the variable display of a special symbol is performed, a preliminary determination is made and a process is performed to generate a first pre-reading designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (special symbol scheduled fluctuation pattern). Note that details of the preliminary determination table will be described later.

This "first pre-reading designation command" is information that can specify the special pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot judgment, the judgment result of the special symbol, etc. It is also possible to specify the type, the type of jackpot game or small win game (number of rounds), and the various time saving times (J1, J2, Z) in the time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first pre-read winning designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and even before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first pre-read designation command starts, the jackpot can be achieved across one or more variable displays. A pre-read notice (continuous notice presentation, icon change presentation) that makes the player expect the game to be played will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reservation number (U1) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reservation number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reservation number. Furthermore, the first reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input. If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process moves to step S240-2, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 2-prize ball counter used for 2-prize balls by adding data indicating 2-prize balls, and in step S240-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-4. If the second pending number (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the second pending number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second pending number (U2) and updating it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, the second pending number (U2) is updated. A corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) are displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S240-3 in the empty storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is in special 2 time saving (first time saving game state). If the special 2 hours are being shortened, the process is moved to step S240-9 as a pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, and the special 2 hours are not being shortened. In this case (in the normal gaming state or during the special 1 time reduction), it is assumed that the pre-reading process of the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 is not performed, and the current second starting opening Detection switch input processing ends.

The main CPU 110a performs a second prefetch process (pre-determination process) in step S240-9. In this second pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIGS. 21(b) and 21(c)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure judgment information is selected, and the special figure judgment information acquired this time is used as the first pre-reading process. 2. A process of generating a second pre-reading designation command for making a preliminary judgment before the variable display of the special symbol is performed and notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the preliminary judgment (special pattern scheduled variation pattern, pre-reading information). conduct.

This "second pre-read specification command" is information that can specify the judgment result of the special symbol judgment information, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the special It is also possible to specify the type of symbol, the type of jackpot game or small win game (number of rounds), and the various times (J1, J2, Z) in the normal time saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets the second prefetch designation command generated in step S240-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second pre-read designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the jackpot game is started over one or more variable displays even before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second pre-read designation command starts. A look-ahead notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) that makes people expect that it will be executed will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the second reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second number of reservations may be made smaller than the upper limit value of the first number of reservations. Furthermore, the second reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
The specific area detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process moves to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input Finish the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current period is a specific area valid period in which passage of the game ball to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small winning game (conversion game) is in progress. If the small winning game is in progress, the process moves to step S260-3, and if the small winning game is not in progress, the process moves to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and a specific area passing flag indicating the gaming state when the game ball passes the specific area 53. Setting game state information when passing through the area (information indicating that the current state is the normal gaming state, information indicating that the current state is the normal gaming state, information indicating that the current state is the time-saving gaming state, if the current state is the time-saving gaming state) in the main RAM 110c, In step S260-4, a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current specific area detection switch input process is performed. end.

Thereby, a specific area passing designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing notification performance is executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a jackpot game is executed). Therefore, the player can understand that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and Detection switch input processing ends.

Thereby, a specific area passing error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing error notification performance is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. Therefore, the employees of the game parlor can understand the occurrence of a passing error and can take appropriate measures.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the process for starting the variable display of special symbols based on the reserved memory (special figure judgment information) and the special figure special electric line processing data are changed to "1". A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed to perform the process and the like.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 1, the special figure special electric line processing data and the process for stopping and displaying the special symbol and transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 130 as the variable time elapses are changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) is executed to perform processing and the like.
If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss, and the opening time of the jackpot game will be set if it is a jackpot special symbol, depending on the elapse of the stop time of the special symbol. Then, the special pattern special electricity processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small hit special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set, and the special pattern stop processing to change the special pattern special electricity processing data to "4" ( Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric line processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing (for performing the process for executing the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round game) Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 4, the processing for executing the small winning game or the process of changing the special figure special electric processing data to ``0'' or ``3'' based on the completion of the ending of the small winning game are performed. A small winning game process (step S350) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 5, the jackpot game ending process is performed to perform the process for ending the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second held count (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second pending number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, specifies the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the second pending number (U2) after the subtraction. The command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the second special figure determination information storage area. A shift process is performed on the stored data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first number of reservations (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first number of reservations (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, issues a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to . As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second reservation number is changed to the first reservation number). However, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information retention storage area or the second special figure determination information retention storage area was shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in the winning order), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the first number of reservations may be subtracted). It may be preferentially subtracted from the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special symbol data of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. Execute jackpot determination processing. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern variation pattern determination process that determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316, sets the variation time of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Start variable display. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. It's okay.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot check to determine whether or not it is a big hit (or not). Select the judgment table (see FIG. 16). The details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current set value and random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, performs special symbol determination for the jackpot to determine the type of the jackpot special symbol. The table (see FIG. 17(a)) is selected, and the process moves to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for jackpot will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small hit, the process moves to step S311-7, and if it is not a small hit, it is assumed that there is a loss and the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small winning (see FIG. 17(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small winning, and moves the process to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for small winning will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a compares the jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not there is a special loss (sudden time saving). If it is a special loss (sudden time saving), the process moves to step S311-9, and if it is a normal loss, not a special loss (sudden time saving), the process moves to step S311-10.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for special loss (see FIG. 17(c)) for determining the type of special loss special symbol, and moves the process to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for special losses will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects a normal loss special symbol determination table (see FIG. 17(d)) for determining a normal loss special symbol, and moves the process to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for normal losses will be described later.

In step S311-11, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination against the special symbol determination table. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

In step S311-12, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

In this way, when a special loss (sudden time saving) is won, a special loss special symbol is determined from the special symbol determination table for the special loss (sudden time saving). Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from a normal loss, and when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to inform the player that the fourth time-saving gaming state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 16(a) is for the first special symbol for determining the special symbol determination information (jackpot determination) acquired based on the winning (ball) of the game ball into the first starting port A45 or the first starting port B46. FIG. 16(b) is a jackpot determination table, and FIG. 16(b) shows a second special symbol for determining the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball) of the game ball into the second starting port 47 (jackpot determination). This is a jackpot determination table for.

As shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the jackpot determination table includes the current setting value, the random value for jackpot determination, and the determination result (big hit, small hit, special loss, normal loss). are associated with each other, and for reference, the approximate winning probabilities for "big win" and "small win" are listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 16(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. Based on the numerical value, it is determined whether it is a "big win," "small win," "special loss," or "normal loss."

For example, according to the jackpot judgment table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 16(b), when the setting value is "1", the 200 jackpot judgment random numbers from "100" to "299" 20,000 random numbers for jackpot determination from ``10000'' to ``29999'' are determined to be ``small hits,'' and the rest are determined to be ``special losses.''

The first feature of the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the jackpot determination for the first special symbol does not determine a "small hit" or "special loss," and the jackpot determination for the second special symbol does not determine a "small hit" or "special loss." There are certain points that are judged to be "special losses." By doing this, it is possible to make the gameplay different when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

The second feature of the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, even if it is not a "big hit" or "small hit", it is determined to be a "normal loss". The problem is that it is always judged as a "special failure (sudden time reduction)". By doing this, when a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, some kind of gaming value (privilege) is always given to the player, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 17(a) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 17(b) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining a special symbol to stop when a jackpot is determined. This is a special symbol determination table for small wins that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the special symbol is determined to be a special loss (sudden time reduction). FIG. 17(d) is a special symbol determination table for normal losses that is referred to when determining the stopping symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a normal loss. be.

As shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(d), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random value for special symbol determination, and the determination result of special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data indicating this determination result is associated with the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the lighting mode of the LED on the special symbol display is listed in the far right column for reference. There is.

The special symbol "00" is a normal loss special symbol in which a jackpot game is not executed. The special symbol "01" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of two round games, and the special symbol "02" executes the second jackpot game consisting of two round games. The special symbol "03" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the third jackpot game consisting of two round games, and the special symbol "11" is a special jackpot symbol consisting of 10 round games. This is a jackpot symbol for executing the fourth jackpot game.

In addition, the special symbol "13" is a small winning special symbol that executes the first small winning game, and the special symbol "14" is a small winning special symbol that executes the second small winning game. The special symbol "15" is a small winning special symbol for executing the third small winning game. The special symbols "30" and "31" are special loss special symbols that make it possible to generate the fourth time-saving game state without executing the jackpot game.

Although the details will be described later, the degree of advantage of each type of jackpot game is as follows: 2nd jackpot game < 3rd jackpot game < 1st jackpot game < 4th jackpot game, considering the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. .

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17 is that the types of jackpot special symbols, small win special symbols, special loss special symbols, and normal loss special symbols are the same without changing depending on the setting value. can be mentioned. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, at least one of the jackpot special symbol and the small prize special symbol may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17 is that when displaying a normal losing special symbol, the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a special losing special symbol is One point is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand the type of special symbol being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17 is that the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46 is a jackpot. (1st result), it is possible to execute any of the 1st to 3rd jackpot games, and the special figure determination information (1st result) obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting port 47 is possible. 2 special symbol) is determined to be a jackpot (first result), one of the fourth jackpot games can be executed. By doing this, the type of jackpot game that can be executed changes depending on the type of special symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is designed not to win a small hit, it may be possible to win a small hit. In this case, it is preferable that the winning probability is lower than that in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-2, and if it is not the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-3, assuming that it is the time-saving gaming state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the normal special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 19(a)) for determining the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, and executes the process in step S313-4. move. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a creates a time-saving special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (FIGS. 19(b), 19(c), and 20(a)) for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the time-saving gaming state. , see FIG. 20(b)), the corresponding table (matching the gaming situation) is selected, and the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, the number of reservations (U1 or U2), and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The special figure variation pattern is determined by comparing it with the special figure variation pattern determination table.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for determining a variation production pattern which is a production mode of the variation production is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a selects the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, specifically, the special number executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, clearing the number of fluctuations to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game). Update the number of symbol fluctuation displays by +1. Note that the number of changes is updated by +1 regardless of whether the game is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. In addition, this number of fluctuations will be referred to in the special symbol fluctuation processing described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is present. If it is not in the time-saving gaming state, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is terminated, and if it is in the time-saving gaming state, in step S313-9, the time-saving is performed according to the remaining number of time-savings (J1, J2, Z). Set the number of times designation command in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified. When this process is finished, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is ended.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
19 to 20 are special symbol variation pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols.

Specifically, FIG. 19(a) is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 19(b) is a first This is the first time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state (challenge mode and rush mode described later), and FIG. 19(c) is the first This is the first time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the time-saving gaming state (legendary mode to be described later), and FIG. 20(a) is the second time-saving gaming state. 20(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the second time saving and third time saving which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the third time saving gaming state (going home mode to be described later). , is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the fourth time saving game state (special 2 remaining hold after special 2 time saving or return home mode described later).

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs a variable display, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data ), the random number for reach determination, the first reservation number (U1) or the second reservation number (U2), the random number for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, the special symbol fluctuation pattern as a determination result, and the special symbol. It is associated with the variable time, and for reference, the content of the performance that can be executed with the variable performance is described.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify at least the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

As for the performance contents shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, "normal fluctuation", "shortened fluctuation", and "super shortened fluctuation" are three performance symbols 70a that fluctuate apart at high speed. , which means stopping without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a in the left and right regions is "7". This refers to a mode in which the display is temporarily stopped at , and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

"Temporary stop" means that the performance symbol 70a slightly swings or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (not completely stopped). ) Refers to the aspect.

"Normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and is a reach effect with the lowest expectation of jackpot. It becomes. In addition, in this embodiment, although a jackpot does not occur with "normal reach", it may be configured such that a jackpot occurs with "normal reach".

"SP Reach" is a super reach performance that is performed after the normal reach performance and has higher expectations for a jackpot than the normal reach performance.
"SP reach + "7"promotion" means that in the re-lottery performance that is executed after the SP reach performance is executed and the combination of the performance symbols 70a that becomes a jackpot is displayed, the performance symbol 70a becomes the combination of "777". It is a performance that will be promoted.

"SPSP Reach" is a special reach performance that is performed after the normal reach performance or after the SP reach performance, and has higher expectations for a jackpot than the SP reach performance. For example, the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special performance more than “SP reach”.

"Full rotation reach" is a reach performance that is performed after a normal reach performance or a super reach performance, and is a guaranteed jackpot performance. For example, from the blackout effect, the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and move at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect than "SPSP Reach", and the final The effect is such that the effect symbols 70a of "7" are displayed in a lined state.

"Chance effect" means that the shutter image closes without a reach effect, and a text image saying "Chance approaching" is displayed, indicating that the shutter image will close and move to the time-saving gaming state (fourth time-saving gaming state), and the final situation will begin. The shutter image opens and a special performance (a performance in which the time-saving transition pattern is displayed in a stopped state) is performed to show that the time-saving game state (fourth time-saving game state) is to be entered.

A "challenge failure performance" is a reach performance using a performance pattern 70a other than "7", a challenge performance to challenge the acquisition of a jackpot game (including via a small win), and a decisive performance performed in the final phase. By operating the performance button 17 at , a failure performance is performed indicating that the challenge has failed and the jackpot game cannot be obtained.

"7 reach challenge failure performance" means that a reach performance is performed using the "7" performance pattern 70a, and a challenge performance that challenges the acquisition of a jackpot game (including via a small win) is performed, and a decision is made in the final phase. By operating a performance button 17 in the performance, a failure performance is performed indicating that the challenge fails and the jackpot game cannot be won.

A "successful challenge performance" is a reach performance using a performance pattern 70a other than "7", a challenge performance to challenge the acquisition of a jackpot game (including via a small win), and a decisive performance performed in the final phase. A success performance (a performance in which performance symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned) indicating that the jackpot game was successfully obtained is performed.

"7 reach challenge success performance" means that a reach performance is performed using the "7" performance pattern 70a, and a challenge performance that challenges the acquisition of a jackpot game (including via a small win) is performed, and a decision is made in the final phase. A successful performance (a performance in which the performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned) indicating that the performance was successful and a jackpot game was obtained is performed.

``Special effect'' means that the shutter image closes without a reach effect and a text image saying ``BONUS approaching'' is displayed, indicating that the shutter image will close and become a jackpot game, and in the final stage the shutter image will open and the jackpot game will occur. A special performance (a performance in which the performance symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned) is performed to show that the game has been acquired.

"V stock consumption performance" refers to the legendary mode that shifts when the performance pattern 70a of "7" is aligned and a jackpot game is executed, effectively guaranteeing two jackpot games (V stock). , a consumption performance (a performance in which the performance symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned without going through the normal reach performance) that suggests the consumption of the guaranteed one jackpot game (V stock) is performed. .

"V Stock Digesting 7 Match Performance" is a legend that transitions when the "7" performance symbol 70a is aligned and a jackpot game is executed, effectively guaranteeing two jackpot games (V stock). In the mode, an extinguishing performance (a performance in which the "7" performance pattern 70a is aligned without going through the normal reach performance) that suggests the use of the guaranteed one jackpot game (V stock) is now performed. There is.

In addition, regarding the "V stock digestion effect" and the "V stock consumption 7 set effect", a special reach effect that does not go through the normal reach effect is executed, but the effect pattern 70a is executed without executing the reach effect. It is also good as a complete performance.

The first feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 is that if you win a special loss (suddenly time-saving) in the normal gaming state, you will have a chance to move to the fourth time-saving gaming state. An example of this is that a performance, such as a performance, that suggests an advantageous result to the player is executed. By doing so, it is possible to effectively arouse the expectations of the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 is that if a special loss (suddenly shortened time) is won in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not newly controlled. One point is that performances that suggest disadvantageous results to the player, such as variable performances and challenge failure performances, are executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent players from having a false sense of expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 is that when the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned and a jackpot game is executed, two jackpot games are actually guaranteed. (V stock) In the legendary mode, when the result is advantageous to the player (big hit or small win), there is a V stock consumption effect that uses the virtually guaranteed jackpot game (V stock). One point is that it is now being implemented. By doing so, the player can play the game with a sense of security, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 21 is a preliminary determination table that is referred to when pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) is a normal preliminary determination table that is referred to when pre-determining special symbol determination information in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 21(b) is a normal preliminary determination table in the first time-saving gaming state. (Challenge mode and rush mode described later) is a preliminary determination table 1 for the first time reduction (special 2 time reduction) that is referred to when pre-judging the special figure determination information, and FIG. 21(c) is This is a preliminary determination table 2 for the first time reduction (special second time reduction) that is referred to when pre-determining the special figure determination information in the gaming state (legendary mode to be described later), and FIG. This is a preliminary determination table for the second to fourth time savings (Special 1 time reduction) that is referred to when pre-determining the special figure determination information in the 4 time reduction gaming state (Special 1 time reduction).

As shown in FIG. 21, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the determination result of the jackpot determination (random value for jackpot determination), and the determination result of the special symbol (random value for special symbol determination). , the random value for reach determination, the random value for determining special figure fluctuation pattern, the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, and the look-ahead information corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern are associated, and can be used as a reference. The content of the performance that can be executed with the variable performance is described.

Therefore, the "scheduled special pattern fluctuation pattern" and "pre-read information" can be said to be things that can identify at least the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed. . Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination process has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2, and if the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process ends.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbols determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3, sets a stop time corresponding to the gaming situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time saving flag (any of the first to fourth time saving flags) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining number of working hours is to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5; if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining number of working hours is not to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5. The process moves to S320-14.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the special 1 time saving number (J1) which is the time saving number of the first special symbol saved in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by one, and if it is not the first special symbol. (If it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the special 2 time saving number (J2) which is the time saving number of the second special symbol saved in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by one.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special 1st time saving number (J1) or the special 2nd time saving number (J2) has become "0". If it becomes "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S320-12, and if it does not become "0", the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S320-13, and if it is a small winning special symbol, in step S320-10, the small winning amount is saved in the main RAM 110c until the time saving gaming state is ended. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of hits (Z).

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins has become "0". If the remaining number of small wins has become "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S320-12, and if the remaining number of small wins has not become "0", step S320 Processing moves to -13.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time saving flags (first to fourth time saving flags) and various time saving times (J1, J2, Z) saved in the main RAM 110c to 0, and ends the time saving game state. .

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a sets a time saving number designation command corresponding to the various time saving numbers (J1, J2, Z) saved in the main RAM 110c in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is sent to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions (Special 1 time reduction number J1 if special 1 time reduction, special 2 time reduction number J2 if special 2 time reduction) is notified. It turns out.

In step S320-14, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state (the gaming state identified from the presence or absence of the time saving flag) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "2" in order to proceed to the special symbol stop processing, and ends the current special symbol variation processing.

In this way, any of the various time saving times (J1, J2) becomes "0" during the time saving gaming state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the first starting port B46 or the second starting port 47 than in the normal gaming state. As a result, the time-saving gaming state ends even if the remaining number of small wins (Z) is not "0". Therefore, the time-saving game state can be ended according to the progress of the game (execution status of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the first starting port B46 or the second starting port 47, the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0", so that various time-saving times (J1, Even if J2) is not set to "0", the time-saving gaming state ends. Therefore, the player tries to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the types of special symbols (combinations of the effects patterns 70a) that are stopped and displayed (by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). Whether the player is aiming for a jackpot or not, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, at the start of the stop display of the special symbol after the variable time has elapsed, that is, at the start of the special symbol's stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds), subtract the various remaining time shortening times, and one of them will be "0". By doing so, the time-saving gaming state is ended. Therefore, compared to the case where the time-saving gaming state ends at the end of the stop display of the special symbol (when the stop time has elapsed), it is possible to provide a more interesting game by expediting the switching of the gaming state, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

Further, the time-saving game state is ended when the remaining number of small winnings becomes "0" at the start of the stop display of the small winning special symbols (before the stop time elapses). Therefore, compared to the case where the time-saving gaming state ends at the end of the stop display of the small hit special symbol (when the stop time has elapsed), it is possible to provide a game with a sharp effect by switching the gaming state earlier than when the time saving gaming state ends (when the stop time has elapsed). It becomes possible to improve the interest of

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S330-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (a small hit special symbol, a special loss special symbol, or a normal loss special symbol), the process advances to step S330-5. move.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot according to the stop special symbol data (jackpot special symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot control data determination table (see FIG. 24(a)) for executing the jackpot game. A jackpot opening transition process is performed, such as selecting game control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of prizes, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-4, in order to transition to jackpot game process, special figure special electric processing data is changed. "3" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S330-6, and if it is not a small winning special symbol (a special losing special symbol, a normal losing special symbol), the process moves to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a inputs the stop special symbol data (small prize special symbol) from the big prize opening control data determination table for the small prize game (see FIG. 24(b)) for executing the small prize game. A small winning opening transition process is performed, such as selecting the corresponding small winning game control data (maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-7, the special figure special electric processing data is changed in order to transition to the small winning game. "4" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. In addition, details of the large winning a prize opening control data determination table for the small winning game will be described later.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets an opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, sets an opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, an opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing the opening performance of the jackpot game or the small win game is performed. When this process is finished, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of fluctuations saved in the main RAM 110c has reached the specified number (600). If the specified number of times has been reached, the process is moved to step S320-11 as a transition to the second time-saving gaming state, and if the specified number of times has not been reached, the process is moved to step S320-11 as not to be transitioned to the second time-saving gaming state. The process moves to S320-13.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the time saving end conditions for the second time saving corresponding to the second time saving game state (special 1 time saving number J1=850, special 2 working time saving number J2=1, remaining number of small winnings Z=1). ) is set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-12, a second time saving flag corresponding to the second time saving gaming state is set. This causes a transition to the second time-saving game state.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special loss special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (suddenly winning a time saving prize). If the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is assumed that there is a possibility of transitioning to the fourth time-saving gaming state, and the process is moved to step S330-14, and the special losing special symbol is not stopped and displayed (normally losing). If the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the process moves to step S320-17 as not to shift to the fourth time-saving game state.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal gaming state is currently in progress. If it is in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S330-15 as a transition to the fourth time-saving gaming state, and if it is not in the normal gaming state (in the time-saving gaming state), it has already occurred. In order to prevent the time-saving game state (for example, the first time-saving game state) from ending midway, the process moves to step S330-18 without transitioning to the fourth time-saving game state.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a determines the time saving end condition for the fourth time saving corresponding to the fourth time saving gaming state according to the type of the special losing special symbol (in the case of the first special losing special symbol, the special first time saving Number of times J1 = 50, Special 2 time reduction number J2 = 1, Small hit remaining number Z = 1, In the case of the second special loss special symbol, Special 1 time reduction number J1 = 100, Special 2 time reduction number J2 = 1, Small hit The remaining number of times Z=1) is set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-16, a fourth time-saving flag corresponding to the fourth time-saving gaming state is set. This causes a transition to the fourth time-saving game state.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a sets a time saving number designation command in the production transmission data storage area according to the remaining time saving number (J1, J2, Z) set in the main RAM 110c. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

In this way, when the number of times the special symbol loss fluctuation display executed after the first condition is met (RWM clear) reaches the specified number of times (the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display was a loss result), And, the number of times the special symbol loses fluctuation display that has been executed after the second condition is satisfied (the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0) reaches the specified number of times (the special symbol fluctuates for the predetermined number of times becomes a loss) result), it is possible to generate the second time-saving gaming state over a predetermined period (until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 850 times). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the surprise that a time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the number of fluctuations (600 times) at which the second time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum time-saving number (100 times) that is set after the end of the jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game Since the second time-saving game state does not occur during the time-saving game state, the inconvenience that the player loses track of the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to zero. Therefore, between jackpot games (after the second time-saving gaming state starts or ends), the second time-saving gaming state will not occur again, and it is possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor and the player. This also makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a special losing special symbol different from the normal losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbols, it is possible to generate a fourth time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the surprise that a time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it becomes easier to distinguish the state from a time-saving game state via a jackpot game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the normal game state is in effect when the stop time of the special losing special symbol passes as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, the fourth time-saving game state is generated, while the normal game state is not (in the time-saving game state). In some cases, the fourth time-saving gaming state is not generated. Therefore, the fourth time-saving game state will not occur during the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, if the time-saving game state that has already occurred (for example, the first time-saving game state) is interrupted, the fourth time-saving game state will not occur. Since the fourth time-saving game state is not newly generated when the game ends, the inconvenience that the player loses track of the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, when a special losing special symbol different from the normal losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, time-saving termination conditions are set according to the type of the special losing special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special losing special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if the fourth time saving game state does not occur during the time saving game state, the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the result of the jackpot determination can be disclosed to the player without falsifying it, and the player can also grasp the stop frequency of special losing special symbols, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the conditions for generating the second time-saving game state and the conditions for generating the fourth time-saving game state are satisfied at the same time, the second time-saving game state is generated with priority instead of generating the fourth time-saving game state. ing. Therefore, the second time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the fourth time-saving game state, occurs, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second time saving game state and the fourth time saving game state are caused to occur at the end of the stop display of the special symbol (when the stop time has elapsed). Therefore, even if the time-saving gaming state has occurred until the stop display of the special symbol starts (before the stop time has elapsed), if the time-saving gaming state has ended at that point, the second time-saving gaming state or It is possible to generate a 4-time saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the time when the stop time of the special loss special symbol has elapsed is in the time-saving game state (various time-saving number of times > 0), the fourth time-saving game state is entered so that the time-saving game state that has already occurred does not end prematurely. However, if you are in the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state via a jackpot game, the fourth time-saving game state overlaps with that time-saving game state or replaces that time-saving game state. When the game state is generated and the second time saving game state is in progress without going through the jackpot game, the fourth time saving game state may not be generated.

(control data table)
FIG. 24(a) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game for controlling the big winning opening during the jackpot game (special game), and FIG. 24(b) is a diagram showing the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game 24(c) is a diagram showing a large winning opening control data determination table for a small winning game for controlling a large winning opening during a small winning game, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific area control data determination table for.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game includes stop special symbol data for special symbols, the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the types of big prize openings to be opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the big prize openings to be opened in each round game. The number of times, the opening time of the grand prize opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time during which the grand prize opening is closed after the end of the round game (in order to eject the game ball from the grand prize opening) required time) and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special pattern data is "01", the first jackpot game in which two round games are played is executed, and when the stop special pattern data is "02", two round games are played. When the second jackpot game is executed and the stop special figure data is "03", the third jackpot game in which two round games are played is executed, and when the stop special figure data is "11", A fourth jackpot game in which 10 round games are played is executed.

In addition, when the stop special symbol data is "13", the 1st V jackpot game in which the remaining 9 round games are played is executed via the 1st small prize game which is the first round game, and the stop special symbol is When the figure data is "14", the 2nd V jackpot game in which the remaining 9 round games are played via the 2nd small win game which is the first round game is executed, and the stop special figure data is " 15'', the 3rd V jackpot game is executed in which the remaining one round game is played via the third small win game which is the first round game.

The characteristics of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game shown in FIG. 24(a) include jackpot games (first to third jackpot games) based on winnings to the first starting opening A45 or the first starting opening B46. When executing, the maximum round (10th round) jackpot game is not executed, while when executing the jackpot game based on winning in the second starting opening 47 (4th to 5th jackpot game), the maximum round (10th round) jackpot game is not executed. One point is that a round (10 rounds) jackpot game can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to make the gameplay different when the game ball wins in the first starting port A45 or the first starting port B46 and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

As shown in FIG. 24(b), the large winning opening control data determination table for small winning games includes stop special symbol data (type of small winning games) of special symbols, and large winning openings to be opened in small winning games. The maximum number of openings, the maximum number of prizes that can be won in the big winning hole in small winning games, the opening time until the big winning hole is changed to the open state, the type of big winning hole to be opened, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening. The opening time of all the big winning openings, the interval time when the big winning opening is closed (the time required to eject the game ball from the big winning opening), and the small winning game from the last closing of the big winning opening. The ending time until the end is associated.

When the stop special pattern data is "13", the first small winning game is executed, and when the stopping special pattern data is "14", the second small winning game is executed, and when the stopping special pattern data is "14", the second small winning game is executed. 15'', the third small winning game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 24(c), the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game includes special symbol stop special symbol data (type of small winning game) and the specific area 53 to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of openings, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In a small winning game, regardless of the type of small winning game, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state when the big winning opening in the small winning game is opened for the first time, and the specific area 53 is changed to a closed state when the big winning opening is closed for the final time in the small winning game. Convert.

As a feature of the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. One point is that the opening/closing timing of the specific area 53 is set so that the specific area 53 is passed through at . By doing so, the player can play the small winning game with peace of mind, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1), it is set to 50%. The specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

Also, depending on the type of small winning game, the specific area 53 may be opened or closed so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1) (for example, the 2 small winning games), and when opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that entered the first large prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4) (for example, a third small winning game). A game) may also be provided.

(Main control board jackpot game processing)
The jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing jackpot game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the set opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, and an in-round flag indicating that a round game is in progress is set in the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-round flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the round game is in progress, the process moves to step S340-6, and if the round game is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the elapsed time from the start of the current round game has reached the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the jackpot game. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-7, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) are determined from the control data of the jackpot game. The opening time of the second grand prize opening 56) is specified, and the main winning opening time and the drive data of the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 50b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 56b) are used. Set it in RAM110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current opening of the big prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round game, and whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-9, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the interval time (closing time) of the big winning hole is specified. time) is set in the main RAM 110c, and at the same time, the drive data for the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied. Specifically, the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 50 or second grand prize opening 56) in this round game has reached the maximum winning number, or It is determined whether the opening time of the final opening has elapsed. If the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied, the process moves to step S340-11, and if the conditions for transition to the interval are not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closing time of the big prize opening) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning prize set in the main RAM 110c is Clear the drive data of the mouth solenoid. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state. Also, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an interval in-between flag indicating that the round is in progress is set. When the interval transition process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current interval is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the interval, the process moves to step S340-13, and if it is not during the interval, the process moves to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-14, and if the interval time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round game in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-17, and if the final round game has not ended, the process moves to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, a round game flag is set in place of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the during-interval flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an ending-in-progress flag indicating that an ending is in progress is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing an ending performance according to the current jackpot game is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether an ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S340-20, and if the ending is not in progress, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special figure special electric processing data is stored in order to move the processing to the jackpot game end processing. is set to "5", and the current jackpot game process ends.

(Small winning game processing on main control board)
The small winning game process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the small winning game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an opening/closing game in progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c, which indicates that the opening/closing game is in progress to open and close the big prize opening, and if the opening time has not elapsed, then , the current small winning game process ends.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is in progress with the opening/closing of the big prize opening. If the opening/closing game is in progress, the process moves to step S350-5, and if the opening/closing game is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening or interval of the small winning game has ended. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-6, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole ( Specify the opening time of the first grand prize opening 50 or the second grand prize opening 56), and determine the opening time of the grand prize opening and the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 50b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid) 56b) is set in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 are satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening timing of the specific area 53 specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 24(c) (in this case, the first opening timing of the big winning opening) has come. If the opening condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-8, and if the opening condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area release processing in step S350-8. Specifically, drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the closing timing of the specific area 53 specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 24(c) (here, the final closing timing of the big prize opening) has come. If the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-10, and if the closing condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area closing processing in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted into a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-12, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. Clear the drive data of the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small winning game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the opening/closing game flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, the current small winning game Finish the process.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passing flag is saved in the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag has been saved, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game, and the process moves to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game is to be executed, and the specific area passing flag is saved. If not, the process moves to step S350-19 assuming that the ending is executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passage flag saved in the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs jackpot game transfer processing in step S350-17. Specifically, control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.), and performs processing such as clearing the time saving flag and various time saving times (J1, J2, Z) saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" in order to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing, and ends the current small winning game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the small winning game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the small winning game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small winning game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 in the ending production corresponding to the current small winning game (during the small winning game, more specifically, during the opening/closing game). Processing will be performed to execute a regret notification effect (such as a regret notification effect to notify that the vehicle did not pass).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the ending time set in step S350-19 is greater than or equal to "0". If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S350-22, and if the ending is not in progress, the current small winning game process is ended.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small hit game process is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, a special figure special electric signal is sent to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process. After setting the processing data to "0", the current small winning game processing is ended.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the small winning game (conversion game) ends (10 openings of the first big prize opening or winning of 10 game balls). The jackpot game is not executed until it is done. Therefore, the player is not put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed without performing the ending of the small winning game. Therefore, the period from the small win game to the big win game will not be extended, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the jackpot game may be executed after the small win game ends.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special symbol data saved in the main RAM 110c in step S360-1, and determines whether the stop special symbol data is a jackpot special symbol in step S360-2. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S360-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (it is a small win special symbol), the process moves to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot that is saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, sets the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot. The first gaming state setting table (see FIG. 28(a)) for the game is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information when passing through the specific area saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, determines the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information when passing through the specific area. The second gaming state setting table (see FIG. 28(b)) for setting is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a collates the acquired gaming state information etc. with the selected gaming state setting table and sets the gaming state flag, the number of time reductions (J1, J2), and the small number of times as the gaming state after the jackpot game. The remaining number of hits (Z) is determined and set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state flag is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

In this way, at the end of the jackpot game executed when the game ball passed the specific area 53 during the small win game, based on the game state when the game ball passed the specific area during the small win game, It is possible to perform predetermined processing (specifically, processing of determining gaming conditions after a jackpot game (gaming status, number of time reductions, remaining number of small winnings), and setting the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 110c). It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (setting the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur in the actual game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, predetermined processing (specifically, after the jackpot game It is possible to perform processing such as determining gaming conditions (gaming status, number of time savings, remaining number of small wins), and setting the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 110c. Therefore, the game performance can be varied depending on whether it is a jackpot game via a small win game or a jackpot game without passing through a small win game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, the predetermined process is not performed based on the gaming state when it is determined to be a jackpot, but based on the gaming state when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. Predetermined processing may also be performed.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing a first gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a second gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the first gaming state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving game state is in effect), a special 1 time-saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special time-saving game state that ends the time-saving game state. The special 2 time-saving number (J2), which is the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z), which is the number of small winning variable displays that end the time-saving gaming state, are associated with each other.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), the second game state setting table includes the stop special symbol data of the small hit special symbol and the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53, which indicates the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53. information, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating that it is a time-saving gaming state), the special 1 time-saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving The special 2 time-saving number (J2), which is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, corresponds to the remaining number of small wins (Z), which is the number of small winning variable displays that end the time-saving gaming state. It is attached.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is that the special 2 time-saving number (J2) is set when the game is executed in the time-saving game state, rather than the special 2 time-saving number (J2) that is set when the game is performed in the normal game state. One point is that there is a small winning game (2nd V jackpot game from the 2nd small winning game, 3rd V jackpot game from the 3rd small winning game) in which the number of special 2 time reductions (J2) is greater. By doing this, the special 2 time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of small winning game can be varied, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The second feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is the special 2 time saving number (J2) that is set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state, and the special time saving number (J2) that is set when the game is executed in the time saving gaming state. There is a jackpot game (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) in which the 2nd time saving number (J2) is the same, and the special 2nd time saving number (J2) of that jackpot game is the same as other jackpot games (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game). One point is that the number of special 2-time reductions (J2) is greater than the first jackpot game, third jackpot game). By doing this, the value of the jackpot game can be made different based on the number of time savings rather than the difference depending on the prize ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game. becomes.

The third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 1 jackpot game (1st to 3rd jackpot game, 2nd V jackpot game, 3rd V jackpot game). ) and a jackpot game (fourth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to two. By doing this, there are two cases in which the normal game state is entered when the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed once during the time saving game state, and a case where the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed once during the time saving gaming state. Since the time-saving gaming state may be maintained at the time, the gaming state can be changed when a game ball hits the specific area 53 during the small winning gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state, rather than when it is executed in the time-saving gaming state. One point is that there is a small winning game (1st V jackpot game from the 1st jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is larger. By doing so, it is possible to vary the remaining number of small wins (Z) set depending on the type of jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game.

Specifically, FIG. 29(a) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 29(b) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final fluctuation). This is a timing chart when this is executed, and FIG. 29(c) is a timing chart when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final variation).

Regarding the gaming state that is referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (playing state, number of time savings, number of remaining small winnings) at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, the timing when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment (when the jackpot is won) ).

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the timing when the jackpot is won. The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, The gaming condition at the time when the jackpot is won is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small winnings) are set. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final variation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot variation display at T1, that is, the jackpot The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status at the time of winning. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game.

Specifically, FIG. 30(a) is a timing chart when a small win fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 30(b) is a timing chart for a small winning that does not satisfy the time saving end condition in the time saving gaming state. This is a timing chart when a variable display is executed, and FIG. 30(c) is a timing chart when a small win variable display is executed that satisfies the time-saving end condition in the time-saving gaming state.

Regarding the game state that is referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number, remaining number of small winnings) at the end of the jackpot game via the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game. The timing is when the game is played (the time of transition to the jackpot game).

As shown in FIG. 30(a), when the small winning variation display is executed in the normal gaming state, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game at T4 at the end of the jackpot game at T6. The gaming condition at the time of the game is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal gaming state has been in effect since the start of the small win fluctuation display, the timing of T4 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), when a small winning variation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition is executed in the time saving game state, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small winning game. The gaming condition (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the gaming condition when the character passes through the specific area 53. In this case, when the small win fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, the various time saving numbers and the remaining number of small winnings are not "0" and the time saving gaming state is maintained, so the timing of T4 is called the time saving gaming state. It turns out. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game starts and shifts to the normal gaming state, but when passing the specific area 53, it is called a time-saving gaming state before shifting to the normal gaming state. It is supposed to be. In addition, in the case of the first time saving game state (Special 2nd time saving) which is transferred after the end of the fourth jackpot in FIG. This state occurs only when the game is in the 1-time saving game state (specially 2-time saving).

As shown in FIG. 30(c), when the small winning variation display that satisfies the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small winning game. The gaming condition (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the gaming condition when the character passes through the specific area 53. In this case, when the small winning fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, one of the time saving times becomes "0" and the time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, so the timing of T4 is called the normal gaming state. It turns out.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the jackpot game ends when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed and when the small win fluctuation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed. The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the gaming state referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (gaming state, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(General control board control process)
Referring to FIG. 31, the general electric power control process of the main control board 110 will be explained. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose electric power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electricity processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded general electricity processing data, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute this to end the current regular electricity control process.

Specifically, if the general pattern/universal electric processing data = 0, the process for executing the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol based on the reserved memory (common pattern judgment information) and the general pattern/universal electric processing data are set to "1". A normal symbol variation process (step S410) is executed to perform a process of changing to a normal symbol. The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later.

If the general figure general electric power processing data = 1, the processing for executing the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner, the processing for changing the general electric figure general electric power processing data to "0", etc. are performed. The auxiliary game process (step S420) is executed.

(Normal pattern variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. If the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S410-12, and if the normal symbols are not in the variable display mode, the process moves to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of normal symbols reserved (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbols held (G) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbols held (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the normal symbol reservation number (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, performs a shift process of the data stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and The ordinary figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the ordinary symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the ordinary symbol determination information reservation storage region. In addition, the ordinary figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the ordinary figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th memory part, which is the ordinary figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th memory part. The normal pattern determination information used in the previous game is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, using the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 33(a)), it is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the gaming state and the random value for hit determination stored in the ordinary symbol execution storage area. decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 33(b)), the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display is determined based on the gaming state, the winning determination result, and the random number value for normal symbol determination. Determine the stop pattern data of the symbol. The details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the stop symbol data.

The main CPU 110a performs normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S410-8. Specifically, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the hit determination result and the random value of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern using the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 33(c)) according to the gaming state. Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of In addition, the details of the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the general pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the common figure variation pattern.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The symbol fluctuation display is started, and the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 62 by being output in the output control process of step S800. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped in step S410-13, and in step S410-14. , a normal symbol confirmation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the production control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (winning winning). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended, and if it is a winning normal symbol, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 33(d)) in step S410-16. Obtain auxiliary game control data to play. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game has started on the production control board 130.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in 410-16 of the auxiliary game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data obtained in 410-16. The data is set to "1" and the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

(Hit judgment table for normal symbols)
FIG. 33(a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referred to when determining a hit based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols corresponds to the gaming state when performing hit determination, the random number value for hit determination, and the determination result of hit determination (win, loss). The approximate probability of winning is listed in the far right column for reference.

A "win" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will be executed, and a "loss" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will not be executed. In addition, only a loss is set for the hit determination, and a special loss (sudden time saving) is not set.

The first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 33(a) is whether the gaming state is a non-time saving state (normal gaming state) or a time saving state (first to fourth time saving gaming states). The point is that the probability (proportion) of being judged as a hit is the same regardless of whether it is a hit or not. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the probability (proportion) of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving game state may be higher than in the normal game state (generating a hit pattern); in this case, depending on the type of the time-saving game state, The probability of being determined to be a hit may be varied. For example, compared to special 1 time reduction (second to fourth time reduction gaming states) in which game balls are more likely to enter the first starting port B, special second time reduction (second time reduction) in which game balls are more likely to enter the second starting port 47, The probability of being determined to be a hit may be higher in the time-saving gaming state, or vice versa.

In addition, for the time-saving game states that go through the jackpot game (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), the regular pattern is made to occur, and the time-saving game state that does not go through the jackpot game (the second time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving game state) Regarding the gaming state), it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of the normal pattern probability change.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG. 33(b) is a normal symbol determination table that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the common symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the ordinary symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the normal symbol determination table includes the gaming state at the time of determination, the determination result of the hit determination (win, loss), the random number value for determining the winning symbol, and the normal symbol determination result. The determination result, the stopped ordinary symbol data indicating the determination result, and the ordinary symbol designation command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a loss normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" and the normal symbol "2" are normal symbols when the auxiliary game is executed.

(Public figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 33(c) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the normal pattern variation pattern determination table includes the gaming state at the time of judgment, the judgment result of the hit judgment, the normal pattern variation pattern random value, and the judgment result of the normal pattern variation pattern judgment. The fluctuation time and the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the determination result are associated, and the stop time of the ordinary symbol is described as a reference.

The first feature of the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the fluctuation time determined in the time-saving gaming state is likely to be shorter than the fluctuation time determined in the normal gaming state (the average fluctuation short) points. By doing this, it is easier for game balls to enter the starting hole (first starting hole B46 or second starting hole 47) in the time-saving gaming state than in the normal gaming state, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

The second feature of the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that there are fewer types of fluctuation time in the time-saving gaming state (one type) than there are three types of fluctuation time in the normal gaming state. can be mentioned. By doing so, the time-saving performance can be varied depending on the type of time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the stop time of normal symbols in the time-saving game state is shorter than the stop time of normal symbols in the normal game state. By doing so, the variable display of normal symbols and the number of executions of auxiliary games per unit time in the time-saving game state can be increased compared to the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 33(d) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of normal winning symbol.

As shown in FIG. 33(d), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop game data, the number of operations of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. The first operation time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, the third opening time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, and the ending time of the auxiliary game. are associated.

In addition, in the auxiliary game, the flow path switching member 48e operates so that the game ball flows down into the right flow path 48c for 1.5 seconds from 0.4 seconds after the first operation of the inlet opening/closing member 48d, Otherwise, the channel switching member 48e operates so that the game ball flows down into the left channel 48b.

Therefore, in the first time-saving game state, the game balls that have been guided by the inlet opening/closing member 48d and have flowed into the conversion mechanism section 48 basically do not flow into the left flow path 48b but flow into the right flow path 48c. The second starting port operating piece 48g is pressed, thereby opening the second variable starting portion 47A, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (the game ball enters the second starting port more easily than the first starting port). It is a special 2-hour shortening method that makes it easier for the ball to win.

On the other hand, in the second to fourth time-saving game states, the game balls that have been guided by the inlet opening/closing member 48d and flowed into the conversion mechanism section 48 basically do not flow into the right flow path 48c but flow into the left flow path 48b. and presses the first starting port operating piece 48f, thereby opening the first variable starting portion 46A and making it easier for game balls to enter the first starting port B46 (first starting port B46 is more likely than the second starting port). It is easy to get the game ball into the mouth (1 time saving).

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that when the auxiliary game is executed in the time-saving game state, the opening and closing of the entrance is An example of this is that the number of operations of the member 48d increases. By doing this, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the starting hole (first starting hole B46 or second starting hole 47) in the time-saving gaming state than in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

A second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that the auxiliary game is executed in the second to fourth time-saving game states more than when the auxiliary game is executed in the first time-saving game state. In this case, the number of operations of the entrance opening/closing member 48d is greater. By doing so, the time-saving performance can be varied depending on the type of time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that the auxiliary game is executed in the second to fourth time-saving game states more than when the auxiliary game is executed in the first time-saving game state. In this case, the operation time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d is longer. By doing so, the time-saving performance can be varied depending on the type of time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. is shortened. The variable display of normal symbols and the number of executions of auxiliary games per unit time in the time-saving game state can be made higher than in the normal game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d), in the first time-saving game state (special time-saving), the game is placed in the second starting port 47 rather than the first starting port A45 or the first starting port B46. One of the points is that it is easy for the ball to land in the prize. By doing so, it is possible to create a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player, is more likely to be executed than the variable display of the first special symbol, which improves the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a sixth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it is easy for the game ball to land in the mouth B46. By doing this, the second to fourth time-saving gaming states can be made into gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state but more disadvantageous to the player than the first time-saving gaming state, and the gaming It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game by improving the game.

(Operating state of variable starting part in various time-saving gaming states)
The operating states of the variable starting section in various gaming states will be explained using FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the normal game state or the time-saving game state, if the auxiliary game is not executed as a result of the hit determination of the normal symbol based on the game ball passing through the normal pattern gate 44, the entrance By maintaining the opening/closing member 48d in the closed state (exiting state), the game balls that have passed through the regular game gate 44 and the subsequent game balls are not guided into the conversion mechanism section 48 by the entrance opening/closing member 48d. It flows downstream.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), when the auxiliary game is executed as a result of the hit determination of the normal symbol based on the game ball passing through the normal pattern gate 44 in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, By converting the entrance opening/closing member 48d to the open state (protruding state), the game ball guided by the entrance opening/closing member 48d among the game balls that have passed through the regular gate 44 and the subsequent game balls are transferred to the conversion mechanism section 48. and flows down the upper channel 48a.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the first time-saving game state (particularly the second time-saving game), when the game ball A that has flowed into the conversion mechanism section 48 reaches the branch section, the flow path switching member 48e is turned to the left side. The flow path 48b is closed and the game ball is guided to the right flow path 48c, and the game ball A distributed to the right flow path 48c presses the second starting port operating piece 48g and closes the second starting port opening/closing member 47b. It is changed to the open state, and the subsequent game ball B enters the second starting hole 47. In addition, the second starting port opening/closing member 47b is converted to the closed state by the weight of the game ball B that entered the second starting port 47, and no more game balls enter the second starting port 47.

As shown in FIG. 34(d), in the second to fourth time saving game states (specially 1 time saving), when the game ball A that has flowed into the conversion mechanism section 48 reaches the branching section, the channel switching member 48e closes the right channel 48c and guides the game ball to the left channel 48b, and the game ball A distributed to the left channel 48b presses the first starting port operating piece 48f to open and close the first starting port. The member 46b is changed to the open state, and the subsequent game ball B enters the first starting hole B46. In addition, the first starting port opening/closing member 46b is converted to the closed state by the weight of the game ball B that has entered the first starting port B46, and no more game balls enter the first starting port B46.

In this way, when the auxiliary game is executed in the first time-saving game state (particularly the second time-saving game), the game guided into the conversion mechanism section 48 by the entrance opening/closing member 48d in the protruding state (open state) When the ball presses the second starting port actuating piece 48g, the game ball becomes easy to enter the second starting port 47. Therefore, the first time-saving gaming state (specially the second time-saving) is a state in which the game ball enters the second starting port 47 more easily than the first starting port A45 or the first starting port B46, that is, the game ball enters the starting port more easily than in the normal gaming state. It is possible to create a time saving state (special 2 time saving) in which it is easy for the game ball to win and the variable display of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, when the auxiliary game is executed in the second to fourth time saving game states (special first time saving), the entrance opening/closing member 48d in the protruding state (open state) guides the inside of the conversion mechanism section 48. When the game ball presses the first starting port operating piece 48f, the game ball becomes easy to win in the first starting port B46. Therefore, the second to fourth time-saving gaming states (special first time-saving) are in a state where it is easier for the game ball to enter the first starting port B46 than the first starting port A45 or the second starting port 47, that is, more than the normal gaming state. It is possible to create a time-saving state (specially 1 time-saving) in which a game ball is easily entered into a starting hole and the variable display of the first special symbol is more easily executed than the variable display of the second special symbol.

(Game flow when a jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state)
FIG. 35 is a game flow when a jackpot game is executed in the normal game state.

As shown in the route shown in (a), when the first jackpot game started with all the production symbols 70a other than "7" in the jackpot variable production ends, the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving: J1 = 9 times , J2=1 time, Z=1 time). Then, in this first time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the normal loss special symbol stops at the fluctuating display of the special symbol, which is the final time in the first time-saving game state. If it is displayed, the mode shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the normal game state will be entered at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time Transition to the fourth time saving game state (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1, Z = 1).

As shown in the route shown in (b), when the second jackpot game started with all the performance symbols 70a other than "7" in the jackpot variable performance ends, the third time-saving game state (Special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 times , J2=5 times, Z=1 time). Then, in this third time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the normal loss special symbol stops at the fluctuating display of the special symbol, which is the final round in the third time-saving game state. When displayed, the game mode shifts to the normal gaming state without shifting to the fourth time-saving gaming state.

As shown in the route shown in (c), when the third jackpot game started with all the performance symbols 70a other than "7" in the jackpot variable performance ends, the third time-saving game state (Special 1 time-saving: J1 = 100 times , J2=5 times, Z=1 time). Then, in this third time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the normal loss special symbol stops at the fluctuating display of the special symbol, which is the final round in the third time-saving game state. When displayed, the game mode shifts to the normal gaming state without shifting to the fourth time-saving gaming state.

As shown in the route shown in (d), when the 4th jackpot game started when the performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned in the jackpot fluctuation performance ends, the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving: J1 = 100 times, J2=100 times, Z=2 times). Then, in this first time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the normal loss special symbol stops at the fluctuating display of the special symbol, which is the final time in the first time-saving game state. If it is displayed, the mode shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the normal game state will be entered at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time Transition to the fourth time saving game state (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

As shown in the route shown in (e), when the condition for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state is satisfied because the number of consecutive loss fluctuation displays of the special symbol reaches the specified number (600 times), the second time-saving gaming state (special 1 Time saving: J1 = 850 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time). Then, in this second time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the special symbol that normally loses stops when the special symbol fluctuates, which is the final round in the second time-saving game state. When displayed, the game mode shifts to the normal gaming state without shifting to the fourth time-saving gaming state.

As shown in the route shown in (f), in the fourth time-saving game state that has transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the final time-saving game state in the fourth time-saving game state If the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol that becomes Transition to time saving game state (special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time). On the other hand, when the normal losing special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round in the fourth time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state without shifting to the fourth time-saving game state.

(Game flow when a jackpot game is executed in a time-saving game state)
FIG. 36 is a game flow when a jackpot game is executed in the time-saving game state.

In addition, if the first to third jackpot games are executed during the time-saving gaming state, the game progress will basically be the same as when the first to third jackpot games are executed during the normal gaming state. , the explanation here is omitted.

As in the route shown in (a), in a time-saving gaming state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" or "2", the fourth jackpot is started when the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned in the jackpot fluctuation production. When the game ends, the game shifts to the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving: J1=100 times, J2=100 times, Z=2 times). Then, in this first time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the normal loss special symbol stops at the fluctuating display of the special symbol, which is the final time in the first time-saving game state. If it is displayed, the mode shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the normal game state will be entered at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time Transition to the fourth time saving game state (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

As in the route shown in (b), the time-saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "2" (the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game due to the production pattern 70a of "7" being aligned) ), when the small winning variation effect that results in the execution of the first small winning game is executed, the remaining number of small winnings Z is subtracted and becomes "1", but since it is not "0", it is a time-saving game. The state is maintained. Then, when the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during the first small win game that is started during the time-saving game state due to the small win variable performance and the performance symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned (no V win) , the remaining number of special 1 time saving number J1 and special 2 time saving number J2 is taken over and the state shifts to a first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) in which the remaining number of small winnings Z becomes "1". On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during the first small winning game started during the time saving game state (with V winning), the first V jackpot game is executed after the first small winning game ends, After the end of the 1st V jackpot game, the game shifts to the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving: J1=100 times, J2=100 times, Z=1 time).

Then, in this first time saving game state (special 2 time saving), the number of time saving times (any of J1, J2, Z) becomes "0", and the final time in the first time saving game state, the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed normally. When the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the stop display of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time, the 4th time-saving game will start. State (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

As in the route shown in (c), the time-saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "2" (the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game due to the production pattern 70a of "7" being aligned) ), when the small winning variation effect that causes the second small winning game to be executed is started, the remaining number of small winnings Z is subtracted and becomes "1", but since it is not "0", the time saving game The state is maintained. Then, when the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during the second small win game that is started during the time-saving game state due to the small win variable performance and the performance symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned (no V winning) , the remaining number of special 1 time saving number J1 and special 2 time saving number J2 is taken over and the state shifts to a first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) in which the remaining number of small winnings Z becomes "1". On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during the second small winning game started during the time saving game state (with V winning), the second V jackpot game is executed after the second small winning game ends, After the end of the 2nd V jackpot game, a transition is made to the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving: J1=100 times, J2=100 times, Z=1 time).

Then, in this first time saving game state (special 2 time saving), the number of time saving times (any of J1, J2, Z) becomes "0", and the final time in the first time saving game state, the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed normally. When the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the stop display of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time, the 4th time-saving game will start. State (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

Like the route shown in (d), the time-saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "2" (the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game due to the production pattern 70a of "7" being aligned) ), when a small winning variation effect that results in a third small winning game is executed, the remaining number of small winnings Z is subtracted and becomes "1", but since it is not "0", it is a time-saving game. The state is maintained. Then, when the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during the third small win game that is started during the time-saving game state by aligning the performance symbols 70a other than "7" in the small win variable performance (no V winning) , the remaining number of special 1 time saving number J1 and special 2 time saving number J2 is taken over and the state shifts to a first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) in which the remaining number of small winnings Z becomes "1". On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during the third small winning game started during the time saving game state (with V winning), the third V jackpot game is executed after the third small winning game ends, After the end of the 3rd V jackpot game, the game shifts to the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving: J1=100 times, J2=100 times, Z=1 time).

Then, in this first time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the normal loss special symbol stops at the fluctuating display of the special symbol, which is the final time in the first time-saving game state. If it is displayed, the mode shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the stop display of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time, the 4th time-saving game will start. State (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

As shown in the route shown in (e), the time saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" (basically, after the end of the jackpot game due to the production symbols 70a other than "7" being aligned) In the time-saving gaming state), if a small winning variation effect that results in the execution of the first small winning game is executed, the remaining number of small winnings Z is subtracted and becomes "0", and the time-saving gaming state ends. Then the game returns to the normal gaming state. Then, when the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during the first small winning game that is started during the normal gaming state after the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned in the small winning variable production (no V winning) , the normal game state is maintained even after the first small winning game ends. On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during the first small winning game started during the normal gaming state (with V winning), the first V jackpot game is executed after the first small winning game ends, After the end of the 1st V jackpot game, a transition is made to the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving: J1=100 times, J2=100 times, Z=2 times).

Then, in this first time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the special symbol is displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, and the special symbol usually loses. When the display is stopped, the mode shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the stop display of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time, the 4th time-saving game will start. State (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

As shown in the route shown in (f), the time saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" (basically after the end of the jackpot game due to the production symbols 70a other than "7" being aligned) In the time-saving gaming state), if a small winning variation effect that results in the execution of the second small winning game is executed, the remaining number of small winnings Z is subtracted and becomes "0", and the time-saving gaming state ends. Shift to normal gaming state. Then, the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during the second small winning game that is started during the normal gaming state after all the performance symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned in the small winning variable performance (V without winning) In this case, the normal game state is maintained even after the second small winning game ends. On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during the second small winning game started during the normal gaming state (with V winning), the second V jackpot game is executed after the second small winning game ends, After the end of the 2nd V jackpot game, a transition is made to the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving: J1=9, J2=1, Z=1).

Then, in this first time-saving game state, the number of time-savings (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the special symbol is displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, and the special symbol usually loses. When the display is stopped, the mode shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final round in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the stop display of the special loss special symbol, but at the end of the stop time, the 4th time-saving game will start. State (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

As shown in the route shown in (g), the time saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" (basically, after the end of the jackpot game due to the production symbols 70a other than "7" being aligned) In the time-saving gaming state), if a small winning variation effect that results in the execution of the second small winning game is executed, the remaining number of small winnings Z is subtracted and becomes "0", and the time-saving gaming state ends. Then the game returns to the normal gaming state. Then, the game ball does not win in the specific area 53 during the third small winning game that is started during the normal gaming state after all the performance symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned in the small winning variable performance (V without winning) In this case, the normal game state is maintained even after the third small winning game ends. On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the specific area 53 during the 3rd small winning game started during the normal gaming state (with V winning), the 3rd V jackpot game is executed after the 3rd small winning game ends, After the end of the 3rd V jackpot game, a transition is made to the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving: J1=9, J2=1, Z=1).

Then, if the time saving number (any of J1, J2, Z) becomes "0" and the normal losing special symbol stops displaying in the fluctuating display of the special symbol that becomes the final time in the first time saving game state, Shift to gaming state. On the other hand, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed in the final game in the first time-saving game state, the normal game state will be entered at the start of the stop display of the special loss special symbol, but the fourth time-saving game will be started at the end of the stop time. Transition to the state (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time).

As shown in the route shown in (h), in the fourth time-saving gaming state that transitions from the first time-saving gaming state without going through the jackpot game, the number of time-saving games (any of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0", and the If the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed during the final round of the special symbol fluctuation display in the 4-hour short game state, it will transition to the normal gaming state at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special loss special symbol, but it will stop. At the end of the time, the game returns to the fourth time saving game state (Special 1 time saving: J1 = 50 times or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time). On the other hand, when the normal losing special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round in the fourth time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state without shifting to the fourth time-saving game state.

As described above, according to the game flow shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in the time-saving gaming state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the first starting hole than the second starting hole (the first starting condition is more likely than the second starting condition). (The starting condition is more likely to be met) Special 1 time saving (2nd to 4th time saving gaming state) and the game ball is easier to win in the 2nd starting hole than the 1st starting hole (2nd starting condition is more likely than the 1st starting condition) (easily realized) and special 2 time saving (first time saving game state), it can be controlled to special 1 time saving after the end of the first jackpot game (second jackpot game, third jackpot game), and the second After the jackpot games (the first jackpot game, the fourth jackpot game) are finished, the time can be reduced by 2 hours. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

Also, according to the game flows shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the jackpot games include the first special game (first to third jackpot games) and the second special game (fourth jackpot game, first V to third jackpot games). 3V jackpot game), when the first special game is executed, it can be controlled to a special 1 time reduction, and when the second special game is executed, it can be controlled to a special 2 time reduction. There is. Therefore, it is possible to attract players' interest in the types of jackpot games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

Furthermore, according to the game flow shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in the time-saving gaming state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the first starting hole than the second starting hole (the first starting condition is better than the second starting condition). is more likely to be established) Special 1 time saving (2nd to 4th time saving gaming state) and the game ball is easier to win in the 2nd starting hole than the 1st starting hole (the 2nd starting condition is more likely to be established than the 1st starting condition) It is possible to control the special 2 time reduction for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (first jackpot game, fourth jackpot game), and the special 2 time reduction (the first time reduction game state). It is possible to control the special time in a short time without executing a jackpot game or a variable display of special symbols after the game ends. Therefore, the type of time-saving game state can be changed according to the progress of the game, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, according to the game flow shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, when the special 2 time reduction ends due to the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol (normal loss variable display), the control is changed to the special 1 time reduction. In the case where the second time saving is ended by executing the variable display of the second special symbol (special loss variable display) without doing so, it is possible to control to the special first time saving. Therefore, the subsequent game state can be varied depending on the type of variable display of the special symbol that ended the special 2 time saving, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the game flow shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, it is possible to control the special 1 time reduction without executing a jackpot game or changing display of special symbols after the special 2 time reduction ends, while the special 1 time reduction ends. The special 2-time reduction control is not performed without subsequently executing a jackpot game or a variable display of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the joy of the players when the control is performed to the special 2 time shortening instead of the special 1 time shortening, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the game flow shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in the time-saving gaming state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the first starting hole than the second starting hole (the first starting condition is better than the second starting condition). is more likely to be established) Special 1 time saving (2nd to 4th time saving gaming state) and the game ball is easier to win in the 2nd starting hole than the 1st starting hole (the 2nd starting condition is more likely to be established than the 1st starting condition) (Easy to do) and special 2 time saving (first time saving game state), if a special symbol loss fluctuation display (number of times determined to be a loss) is executed a predetermined number of times from the establishment of a predetermined condition, a jackpot game is executed. Control can be done in a particularly short time without having to go through the process. Therefore, it is possible to rescue the player when the loss fluctuation display continues, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the game flow shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the condition for ending the time-saving game state is established when the predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) is played the first time (for example, once). A first end condition, a second end condition that is established when a predetermined game (fluctuating display of special symbols) is played a second number of times (for example, 100 times) which is greater than the first number of times, and a small winning game is played a third number of times. (for example, once); and a fourth end condition that is established when the small winning game is played a fourth number of times (for example, twice), which is greater than the third number of times. If a game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small winning game that is executed after a predetermined effect pattern (combination of effect patterns other than "7") is stopped and displayed, the first ending condition is applied after the jackpot game ends. The game ball is controlled to a time-saving gaming state that ends when either of the following and the third ending conditions are satisfied, and a game ball is played during a small winning game that is executed after a specific presentation symbol (a combination of presentation symbols of “7”) is stopped and displayed. When the player wins a prize in the specific area 53, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state that ends when either the second end condition or the fourth end condition is satisfied after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed using a specific performance symbol (a combination of "7" production symbols), it is possible to create a gaming state in which it is easy to perform multiple jackpot games afterward, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the game flows shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the condition for ending the time-saving game state is established when the predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) is played the first time (for example, once). It includes a first end condition and a second end condition that is established when a predetermined game (fluctuating display of special symbols) is played a second number of times (for example, 100 times) which is greater than the first number of times, and during a small winning game. If the game ball enters the specific area 53 in the normal gaming state, control is made to a specific gaming state that ends when the first termination condition is met, and when the game ball enters the specific area during the small winning game. When is in a time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled to end when the second ending condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the same special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the game state after the end of the jackpot can be made different, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of main processing in the production control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are enabled in step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs sub random number update processing in step E7. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the production control section 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E200. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, a process is performed to analyze the command (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Note that details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in a customer waiting state where special symbols are not displayed or special games (big hit games, small win games) are being executed. Based on the fact that the waiting time has elapsed, processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to stimulate the player's desire to play.

The sub CPU 130a performs operation-based performance execution processing in step E500. Specifically, a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable performance is executed, and the expectation level that a jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during this valid period is increased. Processing is performed to execute an operation-based jackpot preview performance that suggests (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed).

The "operation-based jackpot preview performance" includes a dialogue preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot game to be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and the result of the roulette game executed on the image display device. A roulette preview effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed based on the type of cut-in image displayed on an image display device and a display mode; There are four types of winning/losing performances that indicate whether or not a special game will be executed: a successful performance with a 100% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, or a failure performance with a 0% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a lamp lighting effect execution process in step E600. Specifically, by changing the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 75 in accordance with changes in the pending icon displayed on the image display device or the display mode of the icon, the lamp emits light that indicates the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed. Perform processing to execute the performance.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E700. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes normal production modes A to D set in the normal game state (non-time saving game state), challenge mode, rush mode, legend mode A and legend mode B set in the first time saving game state, A return home mode, etc., which is set in the second and third time-saving game states, is provided.

"Normal performance modes A to D" are performance modes in which the normal special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19(a) is selected.
The "challenge mode" and the "rush mode" are production modes in which the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for the first time reduction (special second time reduction) shown in FIG. 19(b) is selected.
"Legend mode A" and "Legend mode B" are production modes in which the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for the first time reduction (special 2 time reduction) shown in FIG. 19(c) is selected.
"Coming home mode" is based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time reduction and third time reduction (special 1 time reduction) shown in FIG. 19(a), and the fourth time reduction (special 1 time reduction) shown in FIG. 19(b). This is the production mode in which the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for (time saving) is selected.

The sub CPU 130a performs a second time saving effect process in step E750. Specifically, a second time-saving effect to suggest information regarding the occurrence of the second time-saving gaming state (an RWM clear negative effect that suggests that RWM clear is not performed (is left unchanged) when the power is turned on; Processing such as determining whether to execute an activation counter display indicating the number of fluctuations until transition to the second time-saving gaming state, etc. is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the overall control section 141 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Mode flow showing transition of production mode)
39(a) is a mode flow showing the transition of the production mode starting from the normal production mode, and FIG. 39(b) is a mode flow showing the transition of the production mode starting from the returning home mode. 40(a) is a mode flow showing the transition of the production mode starting from challenge mode, rush mode, or legend mode B, and FIG. 40(b) shows the transition of the production mode starting from legendary mode A. It is a mode flow.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the normal performance mode is the starting point, the first time-saving game state (special In the 3rd time saving game state (Special 1 time saving) where the challenge mode is set in the 2nd time saving game state (Special 1 time saving) which is executed after the completion of the 2nd jackpot game and the 3rd jackpot game that are executed after all the performance symbols 70a other than "7" are completed. Return home mode is set.

In addition, it is executed after the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned as a specific winning special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") among the plurality of winning special symbols is stopped and displayed. Legend mode A is set in the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) that transitions after the end of the 4th jackpot game and the 1st V jackpot game, and the 2nd V jackpot is executed after all production symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned. A rush mode is set in the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving) which shifts after the end of the game and the 3rd V jackpot game.

Further, a return home mode is set in a fourth time-saving game state to which the state shifts after the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a second time-saving game state to which the state shifts after the number of times the special symbol loses fluctuation display reaches a prescribed number of times.

Furthermore, as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the last reservation memory of the remaining reservation (second reservation) of the second special symbol when transitioning from the first time-saving gaming state (special 2-time saving) to the normal gaming state , If a specific jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") is displayed in a stopped state, the winning fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) that changes after the end of the jackpot. There is a possibility that the display will be executed, and in this case, a situation will arise in which it is virtually impossible to guarantee two jackpot games. A rush mode (legend mode B may also be set) is set in the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) to which the first V jackpot game is executed and then transferred.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), when the returning home mode (special 1 time saving) is the starting point, the first time saving mode is shifted to after the end of the first jackpot game that is executed after the production symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned. The challenge mode is set in the game state (special 2 time saving), and the third time saving game state (special 1 hour short), the return home mode is set.

In addition, it is executed after the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned as a specific winning special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") among the plurality of winning special symbols is stopped and displayed. Legend mode A is set in the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) that transitions after the end of the 4th jackpot game and the 1st V jackpot game, and the 2nd V jackpot is executed after all production symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned. A rush mode is set in the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving) which shifts after the end of the game and the 3rd V jackpot game.

Furthermore, the normal performance mode D is set in the normal game state to which the game transitions after the time saving number (any one of J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0".

As shown in FIG. 40(a), when the challenge mode, rush mode, or legend mode B (special 2 time saving) is used as the starting point, the first jackpot game executed after the production symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned. The challenge mode is set in the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) that shifts after the end, and shifts after the second jackpot game and third jackpot game that are executed after the production symbols 70a other than "7" are completed. A return home mode is set in the third time saving game state (special first time saving).

In addition, it is executed after the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned as a specific winning special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") among the plurality of winning special symbols is stopped and displayed. Legend mode A is set in the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) that transitions after the end of the 4th jackpot game and the 1st V jackpot game, and the 2nd V jackpot is executed after all production symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned. A rush mode is set in the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving) which shifts after the end of the game and the 3rd V jackpot game.

Furthermore, the return home mode is set in the fourth time-saving game state which is transferred after the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), when starting from the legendary mode A (Special 2 time saving), the first jackpot game that is executed after the first jackpot game that is executed after all the production symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned. The challenge mode is set in the time-saving game state (Special 2 time-saving), and the third time-saving game state (which is transferred to after the completion of the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game executed after all production symbols 70a other than "7" are completed) The return home mode is set in (Special 1 time saving).

In addition, it is executed after the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned as a specific winning special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") among the plurality of winning special symbols is stopped and displayed. Legend mode A is set in the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) that transitions after the end of the 4th jackpot game, and the 1st V jackpot game is executed after the production symbols 70a other than "7" are aligned, the 2nd V jackpot Legend mode B is set in the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving) which shifts after the end of the game and the 3rd V jackpot game.

As described above, according to the mode flows shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, there are two cases in which the special 1 time reduction (3rd to 4th time reduction game states) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, and 2 cases in which the special 2 time reduction (1st time reduction game state) is controlled. Different performance modes are set depending on when the game is controlled in a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the current time saving game state is special 1 time saving or special 2 time saving depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, according to the mode flows shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, there are two cases in which the special time saving (third to fourth time saving game states) is controlled via the jackpot game, and a case in which the control is performed without going through the jackpot game. Especially when it is controlled to the 1st time saving game state (second time saving game state), it is controlled to the same performance mode (return home mode). Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the same special time is shortened, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the mode flow shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, a specific winning special symbol (stop special symbol data "11 ", "13") is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game that is executed based on the completion of the production symbols 70a of "7" is completed, two jackpot games are actually executed. It is now controlled by the legendary mode that is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the production pattern 70a of "7" being aligned, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the mode flows shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, when the jackpot variable performance is executed in the time-saving gaming state where a performance mode other than the legendary mode (challenge mode, rush mode) is set, "7" The jackpot fluctuates depending on the proportion of the performance symbols 70a (approximately 15%, which is the sum of the cases in which the fourth jackpot game is executed and the case in which the first V jackpot game is executed) and the time-saving game state where the legendary mode A is set. When the performance is executed, the proportion of the performance symbols 70a of "7" being aligned is different (approximately 2% only when the fourth jackpot game is executed). Therefore, depending on the type of performance mode, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the performance symbols 70a of "7" will be aligned and the game will shift to the legendary mode can be changed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the mode flows shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the time-saving gaming state in which the legendary mode A is set, the proportion of the production symbols 70a of "7" being aligned (the fourth jackpot (approximately 2% only when the game is executed), and the proportion where the performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned when the jackpot fluctuation performance is executed in the time-saving gaming state where the legend mode B is set (the percentage when the fourth jackpot game is The total difference between the case where the game is executed and the case where the first V jackpot game is executed is about 15%. Therefore, depending on the type of performance mode, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the performance symbols 70a of "7" will be aligned and the game will shift to the legendary mode can be changed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the mode flows shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, in the time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) in which the production mode (challenge mode, rush mode, etc.) corresponding to the time-saving game state other than legendary mode A is set. When a specific variable effect (fourth jackpot variable effect) that makes it possible to execute a specific jackpot game (fourth jackpot game or first V jackpot game) is executed, an output where the effect pattern 70a of "7" is aligned is executed. It is possible to display the eyes in a static state, and a specific variable performance executed based on the second hold memory when the time-saving gaming state ends is a predetermined condition (the final hold of the remaining hold memory of the second special symbol). When the condition is satisfied, the stop display of the number of "7" performance symbols 70a in the specific variable performance (fourth jackpot variable performance) is restricted (not displayed). Therefore, depending on the status of the second hold memory when the time-saving game state ends, the rate at which the number of "7" performance symbols 70a is displayed in a stopped state can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Also, according to the mode flow shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the last of the remaining reservations of the second special symbol (second reservation) when transitioning from the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-savings) to the normal game state When a variable effect that enables a specific jackpot game (4th jackpot game or 1st V jackpot game) to be executed in the suspended memory, the first time-saving game state (special 2nd time-saving game) that changes after the end of the jackpot is executed. 1. There is a possibility that the winning fluctuation display of the special symbol will be executed, and in this case, a situation will occur in which it is virtually impossible to guarantee two jackpot games. Stop display of the eyes is restricted (those with all production symbols other than "7" are stopped and displayed). Therefore, even though the number of the "7" performance symbols 70a, which essentially guarantees two jackpot games, is displayed in a stopped state, the two jackpot games are not executed and the state shifts to the normal game state. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of having to play the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Command analysis processing of production control section)
The command analysis process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the production control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step E302, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If the command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power ON notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, a notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. If so, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing power-on notification or power restoration notification, and movable presentation device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable Processing is performed to perform an initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined manner, initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined manner, and the like.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related designation command. If it is an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error system specification commands" include unrecoverable error specification command, unauthorized winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door open error start specification command, door open error end specification This includes commands, operation error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notifications according to the type of error specification command received (unrecoverable error notification, unauthorized winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification) etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, processing is performed to update the gaming state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to the gaming state according to the gaming state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of setting a production instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special symbols stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device. conduct. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetch designation command, the received prefetch designation command (special figure schedule fluctuation pattern) is set in the prefetch storage area described later in the sub-RAM 130c, and then the process moves to step E315; if it is not a prefetch designation command, The process moves to step E318.

The "pre-read storage area" is a first pre-read storage section for sequentially storing pre-read information (special figure schedule fluctuation patterns, etc.) based on the first pre-read designation command, and sequentially stores reservation information based on the second pre-read designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing data, and a storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) being executed. The two look-ahead storage units are each divided into first to fourth storage units.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area described above, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to one pending number. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetching storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the second prefetching designation command is received, 2 Prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special symbol determination information execution storage area, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first pre-read storage unit The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the second look-ahead unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. Ru.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing in step E315. Specifically, there is an expectation that a special game will be executed by displaying the pending icon displayed on the image display device or the icon in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon). Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that indicates the degree (possibility) of the icon change effect, and the mode of effect of the icon change effect to be executed. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emission effect determination process. Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the top lamp 10b located at the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is caused to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode, thereby creating a special game. Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute a winning light emitting effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the prize winning light emitting effect will be executed, and the presentation mode of the winning light emitting effect to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over a variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, expectations are made that a jackpot game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed). It determines whether or not to execute a prefetch continuous performance and the type of prefetch continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute the prefetch continuous performance. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed. Note that details of the prefetch continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, processing is performed to determine the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, a variation production pattern, which is a production mode of a variation production executed by a production device including an image display device, is determined, and a production indicating the variation production pattern is determined. Processing is performed to set the instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable production is performed. Note that details of the fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs jackpot preview effect determination processing in step E322. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, whether or not to execute a jackpot preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Also, a performance mode (pattern) of the jackpot preview performance to be executed is determined, and execution information of the jackpot preview performance is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing is performed to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or to change the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon.

The sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for starting the prefetch continuous performance determined in the prefetch continuous performance determination process of step E317 or for changing the performance mode is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol confirmation command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step E327.

The sub CPU 130a performs production symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped performance symbols and ending the variable performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for ending the variable production is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process moves to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the current command analysis process ends.

The "special game system designation commands" include jackpot opening designation commands, jackpot round designation commands, jackpot ending designation commands, small win opening designation commands, small win ending designation commands, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game performance determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining the opening performance of a jackpot game or a small winning game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the round In the case of a specified command, processing is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of an ending specification command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing a round performance, and in the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance. Processing is performed to set the performance instruction command for determining the ending performance of the small winning game and executing the ending performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is ended. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening production, round production, and ending production is performed.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The "executable period of icon change effect" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, and that when a prefetch designation command based on winning in the first starting port A45 or the first starting port B46 is received, the normal gaming state or the It is in the 2nd to 4th time saving game state (Special 1 time saving), and when a pre-reading designation command based on winning to the second starting port 47 is received, it is in the 1st time saving gaming state (Special 2 working time saving), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is a change scenario in the pre-pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received pre-read designation command), that is, whether a change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. Determine whether If there is a change scenario, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command will not be executed, and the process moves to step E315-7; if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E315-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 43 is referred to, and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode is determined based on the type of special symbol specified by the prefetch designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. Then, one icon final display mode is determined from among the plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) for performing an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for which an icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 44) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 44, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, One change scenario is determined from among a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and changes the winning icon. The icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect (the first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and the second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not to be performed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is to be performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the advance hold includes something that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the reach effect is better when the advance hold does not include a reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than in the case where the icon change effect is included.

In addition, in the second to fourth time-saving game states, if a prefetch designation command related to the first special symbol is received, the icon change effect can be executed, but even if the prefetch designation command related to the first special symbol is received, the icon The icon change effect may be executed when a prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol is received without executing the change effect.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the type of special symbol specified by the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected. ing.

The final icon display mode includes a normal icon (white icon) that does not indicate the expectation of a result that is advantageous to the player (big hit, small hit, special loss), and a normal icon (white icon) that does not indicate the expectation of a result that is advantageous to the player (big hit, small win, special loss). Special icons (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) are set to indicate the level of expectation that the game will result in a loss. In addition, the expectation of a result (especially a big hit or a small win) that is advantageous to the player related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (big win or small win confirmed). ing.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a special loss than when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a normal loss, The problem with this method is that the icon change effect is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower). By doing this, the stop display of the special loss special symbol in the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) where the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed is invalidated, and the fourth time saving game state is entered. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a player is bored due to frequent icon change performance even though the transition does not occur in many cases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that in the case of a prefetch designation command related to the first special symbol, the icon final display mode is determined by referring to the jackpot determination result and the scheduled fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the case of the prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol, the final icon display mode is determined by referring to the jackpot determination result without referring to the scheduled fluctuation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state where the stay period tends to be long, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 04, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

(Pre-read continuous performance determination processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 45, the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is ended.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps the pending number of special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, whether or not it is a jackpot, and the contents of the performance (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E317-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is an executable period for the look-ahead reach effect. If it is the executable period of the pre-reading reach effect, the process moves to step E317-4, and if it is not the executable period of the pre-reading reach effect, the pre-reading reach effect based on the received pre-reading designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Pre-reading reach performance" refers to a series of performances from pre-reach performance (pre-reach performance such as normal fluctuation) to mid-reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, etc.) in reach variation performance multiple times. By distributing (splitting) the variable effects over the variable effects to make it appear as if a single variable effect is being executed, it is possible to shorten the performance time for each variable effect, thereby improving the execution efficiency of the variable effects. At the same time, it is a performance that increases the expectations of the players, and is a type of continuous look-ahead performance.

The "period during which the look-ahead reach effect can be executed" means that the normal gaming state or the second to fourth time-saving game states are in progress, that the look-ahead reach effect is being executed or is not scheduled to be executed, and that the look-ahead countdown effect described below is being executed. Or, it may not be scheduled to be executed, or the jackpot game may not be in progress. Therefore, although it is possible to execute the pre-read ready-to-read effect overlapped with the read-ahead zone effect described later, the pre-read ready-to-read effect is not executed overlapped with the read-ahead countdown effect described later.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a pre-read ready-to-read effect scenario determination table (see FIGS. 46 and 47) for determining a scenario for the pre-read ready-to-read effect. The details of the pre-read reach performance scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pre-read reach effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead reach performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. The pre-read reach effect scenario is determined based on the selection rate (%) of each scenario (whether or not the type of variable time).

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario (scenario 00) of the pre-read ready-to-read effect as a production scenario in which the pre-read ready-to-read effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined pre-read ready-to-reach effect scenario in the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the pre-read ready-to-reach effect scenario is referred to in the above-described variable effect pattern determination process of step E321, and the process for executing the pre-read ready-to-read effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the process moves to step E317-9, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the prefetch zone effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Pre-reading zone production" means performing zone production (display of pre-reading zone background image, display of blue zone image or red thermal zone image, output of zone BGM or thermal zone BGM) over one or more variable productions. This is a performance that continuously suggests the level of expectation for a special game to be executed using a background image, text information, and color information (expected value information), and is a type of pre-read continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed" includes the fact that the game is in a normal gaming state, that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed or is not scheduled to be executed, and that the jackpot game is not in progress. Therefore, it is possible to execute the look-ahead zone effect in combination with the look-ahead reach effect and the look-ahead countdown effect described later.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a prefetch zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining a prefetch zone effect scenario. Note that details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch zone effect scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each preview scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read zone performance scenario is determined from among the plurality of pre-read zone performance scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario (scenario 00) of the prefetch zone effect as the effect scenario in which the prefetch zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch zone effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch zone effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch zone effect is performed.

In step E317-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is an executable period for the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the process moves to step E317-14, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the prefetch countdown effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-16.

"Look-ahead countdown performance" refers to the period when a special game may be executed (variable performance) and the special game by performing a countdown performance (displaying a count image, outputting a count sound) over one or more variable performances. This is a performance that intermittently suggests the level of expectation for the execution of the event using text and sound information, and is a type of continuous pre-reading performance.

"Period in which the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed" means that the time-saving game state is in effect, that the look-ahead countdown effect is being executed or is not scheduled to be executed, that the look-ahead reach effect is being executed or is not scheduled to be executed, and that the jackpot game is not being executed. etc. Therefore, although the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed overlapping with the look-ahead zone effect, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed overlapping with the look-ahead reach effect.

In step E317-14, the sub CPU 130a selects the prefetch countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the scenario of the prefetch countdown effect. The details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch countdown performance scenario in step E317-15. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each performance scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read countdown performance scenario is determined from among a plurality of pre-read countdown performance scenarios.

In step E317-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario (scenario 00) of the look-ahead countdown effect as a performance scenario in which the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-17, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch countdown performance scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch countdown effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch countdown effect is performed. When this process is finished, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is finished.

In this way, the type of prefetch continuous performance to be executed is made different depending on the type of gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate each game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the execution of the look-ahead reach effect where you want to make the boundary between the variable effects vague (or not want people to grasp it), the look-ahead countdown effect that is executed intermittently makes the boundary between the variable effects more likely to become clear. Execution is now regulated (not executed). Therefore, the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance can be fully exhibited, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the execution of a look-ahead reach effect where you want to make the boundary (boundary) of the variable effect vague (you don't want people to understand it), a look-ahead zone effect where the boundary (boundary) of the variable effect is difficult to become clear due to continuous execution. It is now possible to execute Therefore, by combining the look-ahead reach performance and the look-ahead zone performance, the performance effect can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, during the execution of a look-ahead reach effect where you want to make the boundary between variable effects vague (not want people to grasp it), icon change effects that are continuously executed (pending icon change effects, icon change effects) are not allowed. It is possible. Therefore, by combining the look-ahead reach performance and the icon change performance, the performance effect can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that the pre-read countdown effect may be made executable during the execution of the pre-read reach effect. In that case, the execution rate of the look-ahead countdown effect may be lower than when the look-ahead reach effect is not in progress, or the performance effect may be lower than the normal look-ahead countdown effect (for example, the size of the count image or the volume of the count sound may be lowered). (e.g. small).

Moreover, the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted during the execution of the pre-read reach effect. For example, the execution of the pending icon change effect may be restricted, but the icon change effect related to the variable effect that triggered the execution of the pre-reading reach effect may be executed, or the icon change may be more effective than when the pre-reading reach effect is not in progress. The performance execution rate may be lowered.

(Pre-read reach performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a look-ahead reach performance scenario determination table for loss that is referred to when determining a scenario for a look-ahead reach performance when the look-ahead designation command indicates a loss; This is a pre-read reach effect scenario determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when a command indicates a jackpot.

The look-ahead reach performance scenario determination table includes the pending number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the performance details of the advance fluctuation (whether it is a loss fluctuation or not, a specific fluctuation time, etc.) (or not), the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario of each look-ahead reach performance, and the performance scenario of the look-ahead reach performance to be selected. The details of the performance scenario of the look-ahead reach performance will be described later.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. 1 variation ago" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored one time before the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received pre-read designation command, and " 2 fluctuations ago" is a fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored two times before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received pre-read designation command.

"3 seconds or 7 seconds loss variation" in the advance variation column indicates a variation display (variation effect) of a loss with a variation time of 3 seconds or 7 seconds, and "16 seconds loss variation" indicates a variation time of 3 seconds or 7 seconds. It shows a fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) of a loss of 16 seconds, and "other than the above" means that when a fluctuating display of a jackpot is executed, a fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) of a fluctuating time other than 3 seconds, 7 seconds, or 16 seconds. (direction).

The look-ahead reach effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead reach effect is not executed, and a read-ahead reach effect that is executed from the prior variation one variation before to the relevant variation (variation effect corresponding to the look-ahead designation command). A scenario (for example, scenario 01) is set, and a scenario (for example, scenario 03) is set in which a look-ahead reach effect is executed from the previous fluctuation two fluctuations ago to the fluctuation in question.

The first feature of the look-ahead reach effect determination table shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 is that the look-ahead reach effect is executed over two fluctuation displays (fluctuating effects): the advance change before one change and the change in question; There is a point that the look-ahead reach effect may be executed from the previous change two times before the change to three times of the change display (variation effect). By doing this, the look-ahead reach effect does not become monotonous, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the pre-reading ready-to-read effect determination table shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 is that the pre-reading ready-to-read effect is not executed over four or more variable displays (variable effects). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the look-ahead reach performance is delayed and the performance effect is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead reach performance determination table shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 is that when the performance content of the advance variation satisfies the execution condition (loss variation display of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, and 16 seconds), , While the pre-reading reach effect is executed, if the pre-variation effect does not satisfy the execution conditions (other than the loss variation display of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, and 16 seconds), the pre-reading reach effect will not be executed. can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a highly anticipated performance, etc. that was scheduled to be performed in the advance performance is not performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the look-ahead reach effect determination table shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 is that if the fluctuation (the change effect corresponding to the look-ahead designation command) is a change effect that is lower than the normal reach effect, the look-ahead reach effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the case of SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance with higher expectations than normal reach performance, a pre-reading reach performance is executed. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-reading reach effect will be executed, and to improve the player's expectations when the pre-reading reach effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fifth feature of the look-ahead reach performance determination table shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 is that if the variation (variation performance corresponding to the look-ahead designation command) is a full-rotation reach performance that will guarantee a jackpot, then the look-ahead reach performance The problem is that it is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a full rotation reach effect that is guaranteed to be a jackpot is not executed, and a pre-reading reach effect that is not guaranteed to be a jackpot is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone performance scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table includes the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for zone performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of look-ahead zone performance in the relevant fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" means that normal zone effects (display of prefetched zone background image, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed, and "heat zone" means that normal zone effects are executed. A heat zone performance (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone BGM) that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance is executed.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include non-execution scenarios (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed, and scenarios in which the zone performance is not executed during the preliminary fluctuation and the zone performance is performed during the fluctuation ( For example, scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. An example of this is that a performance scenario is set in which the performance mode progresses (changes) to a performance mode in which there is a high expectation that a jackpot game will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to whether or not the performance mode of the performance in the zone will progress (change), thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect progresses (changes) more easily with the change than with the advance change. By doing so, it becomes easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can reach its peak during the fluctuations, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a prefetch countdown performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a prefetch countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table includes the pending number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for the countdown performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of the look-ahead countdown performance for the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Count 3" means that a count image indicating "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 2" means that a count image indicating "2" is displayed and a count sound is output. "Count 1" means displaying a count image indicating "1" and outputting a count sound, and "count 0" means displaying a count image indicating "0". and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the look-ahead countdown effect is executed not only when there is a big hit, but also when there is a small win (a planned fluctuation pattern that makes you expect a small win). Here are some things that are possible. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not a small winning game in which a jackpot game will be executed by the ball entering the specific area 53 will be executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

A second feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the maximum value of the count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. By doing so, the player will have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the performance mode of the look-ahead countdown effect is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small win. By doing so, the player will have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether or not there is an execution scenario (other than scenario 00) for the look-ahead reach effect in the sub RAM 130c. . If there is no execution scenario for the pre-read ready-to-read effect, the process moves to step E321-3, and if there is an execution scenario for the pre-read ready-to-read effect, the process moves to step E321-4.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a selects a variable performance pattern determination table (see FIGS. 51 to 53) according to the current performance mode. The details of the variable effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a variable effect pattern and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, based on the type of special symbol corresponding to the variable pattern designation command, the type of variable pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, One variable performance pattern is determined from among a plurality of variable performance patterns.

In step E321-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a variable effect pattern according to the look-ahead reach effect scenario, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for normal performance modes A to D that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern in normal performance modes A to D (normal gaming state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for the challenge & rush mode that is referred to when determining the variable performance pattern in the challenge mode and rush mode (special 2 time reduction), and FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the legendary mode that is referred to when determining the variable effect pattern in the returning mode, and FIG. It is a figure showing a fluctuation production pattern judgment table.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the variable effect pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol corresponding to the special figure variable pattern designation command, the type of special figure variable pattern, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, The variable performance patterns to be selected are associated with each other, and the performance configuration of each variable performance pattern is described for reference.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal fluctuation display in which no ready-to-win state is formed by the performance symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.
"Reach-in-the-reach promotion" indicates that a production is performed to incite whether or not a ready-to-reach state is formed using the production pattern 70a.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure of the sequence.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"Character SP reach" indicates that a SP reach effect is performed in which a character effect is performed to determine whether or not the character accomplishes a task.
"Confrontation SP reach" indicates that an SP reach performance is performed in which a confrontation performance is performed to determine whether or not the ally character wins against the enemy character.
"Live SPSP Reach" indicates that an SPSP Reach performance in which a live singing performance by a specific character is performed is performed.
"Super SPSP reach performance" indicates that a special performance with higher expectations than the live SPSP reach performance will be performed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP symbol temporary stop" indicates that a production symbol (developed symbol) that suggests that SP reach production is executed is temporarily stopped.
"SPSP symbol temporary stop" indicates that the performance symbol (SPSP symbol) that suggests that the SPSP reach performance is to be temporarily stopped.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Blackout" indicates that the screen is blacked out and a blackout effect that suggests that a full rotation reach is executed is executed.

"Special effect" indicates that the above-mentioned special effect is executed.
"Chance production" indicates that the above-mentioned chance production is executed.
The "sudden reach" indicates that a reach effect is suddenly performed using the effect pattern 70a other than "7" without going through the normal reach effect.
The "sudden reach of 7" indicates that a reach effect using the "7" effect pattern 70a is suddenly performed without going through the normal reach effect.
"Challenge performance→failure" indicates that as a result of the execution of the challenge performance described above, a failure performance indicating that the challenge has failed is performed.
"Challenge performance→success" indicates that a success performance indicating that the challenge was successful is executed as a result of the execution of the challenge performance described above.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision → Failure" means that a decision performance that suggests the result of jackpot determination is executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period, and a jackpot game is not executed as a result of the determination performance. This indicates that a failure performance suggesting the following will be executed.
Which indicates that.
"Decision → Success" indicates that the above-mentioned decision performance is executed, and a decision success performance that suggests that a jackpot game is executed as a result of the decision performance is executed.

"Loss" indicates that the game is temporarily stopped by forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948", which is different from the initial number) using the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers.
"c pattern loss" indicates that a loss result (a loss display mode such as ``358'' or ``948'', which is different from the initial result) is formed by the performance pattern 70a including characters and numbers, and a temporary stop is made. ing.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a winning number (jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") is formed by the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.
"C pattern alignment" indicates that a winning number (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") is formed by the effect pattern 70a including characters and numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"V stock consumption effect" indicates that the above-mentioned V stock consumption effect is executed.
"Special symbol stop" indicates that a special symbol suggesting execution of a jackpot game is stopped and displayed.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 is that in the normal game effect mode (normal game state), the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, after the end of the fourth jackpot game, a full rotation reach performance is executed in which the performance symbols 70a of "7" indicating a shift to the legend mode are aligned. By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect when shifting to the legendary mode, which is a state in which it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 is that in the challenge mode or rush mode (special 2 time saving), the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, after the end of the fourth jackpot game, a full rotation reach performance is executed in which the performance symbols 70a of "7" indicating a shift to the legend mode are aligned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect when shifting to the legendary mode, which is a state in which it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 is that when the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol in the returning home mode (special 1 time saving), The point is that after the end of the fourth jackpot game, a full-rotation ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance symbols 70a of "7" indicating a transition to the legend mode are aligned. By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect when shifting to the legendary mode, which is a state in which it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 is that in the legendary mode (special 2 time saving) in which it is virtually certain that a jackpot game will be executed, when a jackpot or small win occurs. One of the points is that a V stock consumption effect is executed without a normal reach effect. By doing this, it is possible to impress on the player that it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed in the legendary mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, instead of executing a full rotation reach, the SP reach effect is performed so that the effect symbols 70a of "7" are finally aligned. The "7" performance symbols 70a may be aligned in the re-lottery effect after executing the SPSP reach effect, or the "7" effect symbols 70a may be aligned in the re-lottery effect after the SPSP reach effect is executed. good.

(Production pattern related to the pre-read reach production scenario in which SP reach production is executed)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a production pattern related to a pre-read ready-to-reach production scenario in which SP ready-to-win production is executed.

As mentioned above, the look-ahead reach performance is a fluctuating performance multiple times on the condition that the previous pre-variation and the second pre-variation are losses and the variation time is 3 seconds, 7 seconds, and 16 seconds. This is a performance that makes it appear as if it were a single reach variation performance.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the normal SP reach performance pattern in which the pre-reading reach performance is not performed is a performance that is completed in one fluctuating performance, and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts at the same time as the start of the fluctuating performance. After a predetermined time has elapsed, a normal reach performance is started, and after the SP symbol is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area, an SP development performance is executed and a character SP reach performance or a confrontation SP reach performance is executed. Although the case where the SP symbol temporarily stops has been described here, the SP development effect may be executed without the SP symbol temporarily stopping.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 01 is a scenario that makes two fluctuation performances appear as if they were one SP reach fluctuation performance, and the The fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts with the start of the fluctuation, the normal reach performance starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the SP symbol temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops displaying, and with the start of the fluctuation, the central fluctuation display starts. The area is changed again, the SP development effect is executed, and the character SP reach effect or the confrontation SP reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 54(c), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 02 is a scenario that makes two fluctuation performances appear as if they were one SP reach fluctuation performance, and the The fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts with the start of the fluctuation, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a pseudo continuous performance is executed and the performance pattern 70a fluctuates again, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a normal reach performance is started, and the display is displayed in the center fluctuation display area. After the SP symbol is temporarily stopped, it is stopped and displayed, and when the fluctuation starts, the central fluctuation display area is changed again to perform SP development performance and perform character SP reach performance or confrontation SP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 54(d), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 03 is a scenario in which three fluctuation performances are shown as if they were one SP reach fluctuation performance, and two fluctuations before the The variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started with the start of the variation, the normal reach performance is started after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the SP symbol is temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed in the central variable display area. Then, with the start of the preliminary variation one variation before, the central variation display area is varied again, the SP development performance is executed, and the first half performance of the character SP reach performance or the confrontation SP reach performance is executed. After that, the losing effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed in the center variable display area, and at the same time as the change starts, the center variable display area is changed again and the second half of the character SP reach effect or confrontation SP reach effect is executed. .

As shown in FIG. 54(e), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 04 is a scenario in which three fluctuation performances are shown as if they were one SP reach fluctuation performance, and two fluctuations before the The fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts with the start of the fluctuation, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a pseudo continuous performance is executed and the performance pattern 70a fluctuates again, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a normal reach performance is started, and the display is displayed in the center fluctuation display area. After the SP symbol has temporarily stopped, it is displayed in a stopped state. Then, with the start of the preliminary variation one variation before, the central variation display area is varied again, the SP development performance is executed, and the first half performance of the character SP reach performance or the confrontation SP reach performance is executed. After that, the losing effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed in the center variable display area, and at the same time as the change starts, the center variable display area is changed again and the second half of the character SP reach effect or confrontation SP reach effect is executed. .

In addition, the period A in FIG. 54 is the executable period of the line preview performance that is executed before the start of the normal reach performance (execution regulation period of the roulette preview performance, cut-in performance, and decisive performance), and the period B is is the executable period of the roulette preview performance that is executed during the normal reach performance (execution regulation period of dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, and decisive performance), and period C is the execution period for the roulette preview performance that is executed during the SP reach performance. This is the executable period for cut-in preview performances (execution regulation period for line preview performances, roulette preview performances, and decisive performances), and period D is the executable period for cut-in preview performances that are executed during SP reach performances. (Execution regulation period for dialogue previews, roulette previews, and cut-in performances).

(Production pattern related to the pre-reading reach production scenario in which SPSP reach production is executed)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a production pattern related to a pre-reading ready-to-reach production scenario in which SPSP ready-to-reach production is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), the normal SPSP reach performance pattern in which the pre-reading reach performance is not performed is a performance that is completed in one fluctuating performance, and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts with the start of the fluctuating performance. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the normal reach effect is started, and after the SP symbol is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area, the SP development effect is executed, and the character SP reach effect or confrontation SP reach effect is executed, and the SP symbol is displayed in the center variable display area. The performance pattern 70a that results in a loss is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, the central variable display area is changed again, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the live SPSP reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 11 is a scenario in which two fluctuation performances are shown as if they were one SPSP reach fluctuation performance. The fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts with the start of the fluctuation, the normal reach performance starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the SP symbol temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops displaying, and with the start of the fluctuation, the central fluctuation display starts. The area is changed again, the SP development performance is executed, the character SP reach performance or the confrontation SP reach performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a that becomes a loss is temporarily stopped in the central fluctuation display area. Thereafter, the central variable display area is changed again, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the live SPSP reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 11 is a scenario in which two fluctuation performances are shown as if they were one SPSP reach fluctuation performance. At the same time as the fluctuation starts, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed and the performance symbol 70a is fluctuated again, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, a normal reach performance is started, and the display is displayed in the center fluctuation display area. After the SP symbol temporarily stops, it is stopped and displayed, and as the fluctuation starts, the center fluctuation display area is changed again, the SP development effect is executed, the character SP reach effect or the confrontation SP reach effect is executed, and the center change display The effect pattern 70a that is a loss in the area is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, the central variable display area is changed again, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the live SPSP reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(d), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 13 is a scenario in which three fluctuation performances are shown as if they were one SPSP reach fluctuation performance, and the two fluctuations before the The variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started with the start of the variation, the normal reach effect is started after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the SP pattern is temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed in the central variable display area. Then, with the start of the preliminary variation one variation before, the central variation display area is varied again, the SP development effect is executed, and the character SP reach effect or the confrontation SP reach effect is executed. After that, the losing performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, and at the same time as the fluctuation starts, the central variable display area is changed again to execute the second half of the character SP reach effect or confrontation SP reach effect, The effect pattern 70a that is a loss is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. Further, the central variable display area is changed again, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the live SPSP reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(e), the look-ahead reach performance based on the look-ahead reach performance scenario 13 is a scenario in which three fluctuation performances are shown as if they were one SPSP reach fluctuation performance, and two fluctuations before the At the same time as the fluctuation starts, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed and the performance symbol 70a is fluctuated again, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, a normal reach performance is started, and the display is displayed in the center fluctuation display area. After the SP symbol has temporarily stopped, it is displayed in a stopped state. Then, with the start of the preliminary variation one variation before, the central variation display area is varied again, the SP development effect is executed, and the character SP reach effect or the confrontation SP reach effect is executed. After that, the losing performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, and at the same time as the fluctuation starts, the central variable display area is changed again to execute the second half of the character SP reach effect or confrontation SP reach effect, The effect pattern 70a that is a loss is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. Further, the central variable display area is changed again, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the live SPSP reach effect is executed.

In addition, the period A in FIG. 55 is the executable period for pre-reach preview performances such as line preview performances (execution regulation period for roulette preview performances, cut-in performances, and decisive performances), and the period B is the period during which the roulette preview performances, cut-in performances, and decisive performances can be executed. This is the executable period for preview performances during normal reach such as preview performances (execution regulation period for pre-reach preview performances), and period C is the execution regulation period for cut-in preview performances that are executed during SP reach performances. The period D is the executable period for the cut-in preview performance that is executed during the SP reach performance, and the period E is the execution restriction period (the dialogue This is the execution regulation period for preview performances, roulette preview performances, and cut-in performances).

In this way, according to the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, based on the jackpot determination result, after performing the normal reach performance (first specific performance) in the first variable performance, the SP reach performance (second specific performance) is performed. ), and if it is determined in advance that the SP reach effect (second specific effect) will be executed in a state where there is a pending memory, the normal reach effect (first specific effect) will be executed in the variable effect one before executing the SP reach effect. ), and in the next variable performance, it is possible to perform the SP reach performance (second specific performance) without executing the normal reach performance (first specific performance). Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel variable performance that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by distributing (dividing) the series of performances from the normal reach performance to the SP reach performance over multiple variable performances, it is possible to make it appear as if one variable performance is being executed, and each variation performance Since it is also possible to shorten the presentation time, it is also possible to improve the execution efficiency of the variable presentation.

Furthermore, according to the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, based on the jackpot determination result, after performing the normal reach performance (first specific performance) in the first variable performance, the SP reach performance (second specific performance) is performed. It is possible to perform a performance (normal SPSP reach performance) that performs a SPSP reach performance (third specific performance) after that, and based on the preliminary judgment (pre-reading) result, it is possible to perform a performance (normal SPSP reach performance) that performs a preview target (variable performance corresponding to the preliminary judgment result) A normal reach performance (first specific performance) is performed in the previous variable performance, an SP reach performance is performed without executing the normal reach performance in the variable performance subject to notice, and then a performance in which an SPSP reach performance is performed (pre-read SPSP reach It is now possible to perform Therefore, it is possible to execute a novel variable performance that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, based on the jackpot determination result, after the normal reach performance (first specific performance) is performed in the first variable performance, the SP reach performance (second specific performance) is performed. It is possible to execute the first half performance (first period performance), and then execute the second half performance (second period performance) of the SP reach performance (second specific performance), and to execute the SP reach performance (second period performance) with the pending memory. If it is determined in advance that the SP reach performance (specific performance) will be executed, the first half of the SP reach performance will be executed after the normal reach performance (first specific performance) is executed in the variable performance immediately before the SP reach performance (second specific performance) is executed. (first period performance), and in the next variable performance, SP without executing the first half performance (first period performance) of the normal reach performance (first specific performance) and SP reach performance (second specific performance). The second period performance (second half performance) of the reach performance (second specific performance) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel variable performance that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Relationship between the combination of production symbols and the executed skill production)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between the combination of performance symbols and the skill performance to be executed.

The "skill performance" is an activation trigger performance that activates various expected performances that make players expect to execute a jackpot game in connection with the display (temporary stop, stop display) of a specific combination of performance symbols.

Various expected performances include the above-mentioned icon change performance (pending icon change performance, icon change performance), accessory power that charges power to the first movable member 73a that operates at the time of the final performance (makes it emit light in a predetermined light emission mode). Charge performance, the above-mentioned look-ahead zone performance (zone performance activation, zone performance expectation change), timer performance that suggests the execution timing of a predetermined performance, intense heat that suggests that expectations are high that the result will be advantageous to the player. Examples include display effects, etc.

When a combination of performance symbols 70a of "11X", "1X1", and "X11" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates an icon change performance is executed.
When a combination of performance symbols 70a of "22X", "2X2", and "X22" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates the accessory power charge performance is executed.
When a combination of performance symbols 70a of "33X", "3X3", and "X33" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance for activating a look-ahead zone performance is executed.

When a combination of performance symbols 70a of "44X", "4X4", and "X44" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates the accessory power charge performance is executed.
When a combination of performance symbols 70a of "55X", "5X5", and "X55" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates a timer performance is executed.
When a combination of the performance symbols 70a of "66X", "6X6", and "X66" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates the accessory power charge performance is executed.

When a combination of the performance symbols 70a of "77X", "7X7", and "X77" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates a super hot display performance is executed.
When a combination of the performance symbols 70a of "88X", "8X8", and "X88" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates the accessory power charge performance is executed.
When a combination of performance symbols 70a of "99X", "9X9", and "X99" is displayed (temporary stop, permanent stop), a skill performance that activates a timer performance is executed.

In addition, regarding "X" among the combinations of performance symbols 70a, in addition to the case where it is being displayed in a variable manner, any of the performance symbols 1 to 9 may be displayed temporarily or stopped.

In this way, while the variable performance is being executed, it is possible to execute the skill performance of activating various expected performances that make the player expect to execute the jackpot game. Therefore, compared to the case where the expected performance is simply executed, the performance effect and sense of expectation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, during the execution of the variable performance, the skill performance is executed in connection with the display (temporary stop, stop display) of a specific combination of performance symbols. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not a specific combination of performance symbols will be displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a skill performance corresponding to the type (roll) of a specific combination of performance symbols is executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the type of combination (roll) of specific performance symbols displayed in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during execution of the variable performance, if the first combination of performance symbols (for example, a combination including two "1" production symbols 70a) is displayed (temporarily stopped, stopped display), the first skill A production (icon change production) can be executed, and a second combination of production symbols (for example, a combination including two production symbols 70a of "2", "4", or "8") is displayed (temporary stop, stop Display), the second skill performance (accessory power charge performance) can be executed, and the third combination of the performance symbols 70a (a combination including two "3" performance symbols 70a) is displayed ( (temporary stop, stop display), the third skill performance (zone performance) can be performed, and the fourth combination of performance symbols (a combination including two production symbols 70a of "5" or "9") ) is displayed (temporary stop, stop display), the fourth skill performance (timer performance) can be executed, and the fifth combination of performance symbols (a combination including two production symbols 70a of "7") ) is displayed (temporary stop, stop display), the fifth skill performance (extreme heat display performance) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a wide variety of skill presentations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the types of combinations (outputs) of specific effect symbols for which the skill effect is executed include those forming a reach outcome (for example, "1X1", etc.). Therefore, the skill performance can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the reach performance that makes the player look forward to it, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the types of combinations (outputs) of specific effect symbols for which skill effects are executed include those that do not form a reach outcome (for example, "1X1", etc.). Therefore, even in a variable performance in which losing numbers are displayed, it is possible to keep the player feeling hopeful until the end, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding skill performances, variable performances in which pseudo-continuous performances are executed are easier to execute (execution rate is higher) than variable performances in which pseudo-continuous performances are not executed. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the pseudo-continuous performance, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the skill performance can be executed simultaneously with the pre-read reach performance. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the look-ahead skill performance, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when two types of skill production are performed with variable production)
An example of a performance when two types of skill performances are performed in a variable performance will be described using FIG. 57. Here, it is assumed that a skill presentation related to an icon change presentation and a skill presentation related to a timer presentation are executed.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), a variable display (variable display of the production symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1) in which a showdown SP reach production is executed is being executed, and the relevant display mode (white icon) is normal display mode. An icon TI and one pending icon HI are displayed.

When a predetermined period of time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. (1 type)) is executed, and the icon TI changes from a white icon to a blue icon. Specifically, by wrapping the effect image around the number of the "1" production pattern 70a, it is suggested that a specific combination of production symbols (here, "1X1") has been created, and the "1" production pattern 70a A skill activation image (“1” (change) skill activation) is displayed in connection with the character's action, and a voice saying “skill activation” is output. Then, an effect is performed on the icon TI using the skill activation image as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon TI changes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the pseudo symbol ("NEXT") suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is temporarily stopped in the center fluctuating display area, and as shown in FIG. 57(d), all The production pattern 70a changes again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of re-variation, as shown in FIG. 57(e), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right variation display areas and the reach number is displayed, and the timer effect is activated. The relevant skill performance is executed and the timer performance is activated. Specifically, by wrapping the effect image around the number of the "5" production pattern 70a, it is suggested that a specific combination of production symbols has been created, and the character of the "5" production pattern 70a will move. Relatedly, a skill activation image (“5” (change) skill activation) is displayed and a voice saying “skill activation” is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a timer image TM indicating "5 seconds" is displayed.

Then, when 2 seconds have passed since the timer image was displayed, the number of seconds on the timer image TM becomes "3 seconds" as shown in FIG. 57(f), and as shown in FIG. 57(g), the SP When 5 seconds have passed since the timer image was displayed while the development effect is being executed, the number of seconds on the timer image TM will indicate "0 seconds", and as shown in FIG. 57(h), the timer effect will The showdown SP reach performance for which the execution timing has been suggested is started, and the timer image TM is erased. Further, the icon TI changes from a blue icon to a red icon.

Thereafter, when the final phase of the showdown SP reach performance comes, a cut-in performance is executed as shown in FIG. 57(i). Specifically, a cut-in image CI including a character is displayed, and a sound saying "Chance to win!" is output along with a cut-in sound effect.

When the execution period of the cut-in effect ends, as shown in FIG. 57(j), the cut-in effect is temporarily stopped in a state where the effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned. Then, when the temporary stop time has elapsed, the performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed, and the jackpot game performance is started.

In this way, in the skill performance that is executed in connection with the display of the performance pattern 70a that results in a specific combination (roll), a performance using the character of the displayed performance pattern 70a is executed. ing. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand the relationship between the type of performance symbol 70a and the expected performance triggered by the skill performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, it is possible to perform skill performances multiple times during one variable performance, and there are times when the same skill performance is performed and times when different skill performances are performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding which skill performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example 1 of effect when pre-reading reach effect is executed)
With reference to FIG. 58, a first example of the effect when the pre-reading reach effect is executed will be described. Here, it is assumed that the pre-read ready-to-read effect is executed over two variable effects according to the pre-read ready-to-read effect scenario 01.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1) based on the normal variable performance pattern is being executed. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port A45 and the first reservation number becomes "2", the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "2" and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. In the section, an animation of increasing the pending icon (here, the blue icon that is the target of the look-ahead reach effect) is executed.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the combination of performance symbols 70a including the "3" production symbol 70a in the center and left side is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the next With the start of the variable performance, a skill performance related to a look-ahead zone performance (a type of expected performance) is executed, and a zone performance is executed. Specifically, by wrapping the effect image around the number "3" in the production pattern 70a, it is suggested that a specific combination of production symbols (here, "X33") has been obtained.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(c), when the variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1) that is a pre-variation before the pre-read reach performance is started, the "3" In connection with the movement of the character of the production pattern 70a, a skill activation image ("3" (zone) skill activation) is displayed and a voice saying "skill activation" is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a zone effect (display of zone image ZG and zone background image, output of zone BGM) is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(d), when the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the reach number is displayed, the skill effect related to the timer effect is executed and the timer effect is executed. The performance is activated. Specifically, by wrapping the effect image around the number of the "5" production pattern 70a, it is suggested that a specific combination of production symbols has been created, and the character of the "5" production pattern 70a will move. Relatedly, a skill activation image (“5” (change) skill activation) is displayed and a voice saying “skill activation” is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a timer image TM indicating "5 seconds" is displayed.

Thereafter, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 1 special symbol TZ1 is stopped and displayed, and the icon TI is deleted. At this time, the number of seconds on the timer image TM indicates "1 second".

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(f), the fluctuation performance (the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a in the center fluctuation display area and the first special symbol TZ1) that corresponds to the fluctuation of the look-ahead SP reach performance changes. At the same time as the start, the blue icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and changes to a red icon. Furthermore, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the timer image TM was displayed, the number of seconds on the timer image becomes "0 seconds", and as shown in FIG. 58(g), the confrontation SP whose execution timing is suggested by the timer effect The reach effect is started and the timer image TM is erased.

Thereafter, when the final stage of the showdown SP reach performance comes, a cut-in performance is executed as shown in FIG. 58(h). Specifically, a cut-in image CI including a character is displayed, and a sound saying "Chance to win!" is output along with a cut-in sound effect.

When the execution period of the cut-in effect ends, as shown in FIG. 58(i), the cut-in effect is temporarily stopped in a state where the effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned. Then, when the eye-catching performance is executed and the temporary stop time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot game performance is started, as shown in FIG. 58(j).

In addition, in the case of the look-ahead reach performance scenario 11 in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, after the performance symbol 70a that results in a reach loss roll in FIG. 58(i) is temporarily stopped, the development performance to the SPSP reach performance is executed. The first pending icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C become non-display, and the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and at the same time, the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is started. After that, the effect pattern 70a that results in a reach loss or jackpot outcome is temporarily stopped, an eye-catching effect is executed, the first pending icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the temporary stop time is When the period has elapsed, the performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed, and the jackpot game performance is started.

In this way, in the advance variation performance that is one variation before the target variation of the look-ahead SP reach performance, the SP symbol that makes it appear that the performance will continue to the next variation performance is stopped and displayed, and at the start of the relevant variation performance of the look-ahead SP reach performance. Only the central variable display area is changed again to start the SP reach effect. Therefore, it becomes easier to show a plurality of fluctuating performances as one fluctuating performance, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance and improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is possible to execute a timer performance, which is a type of expected performance, from a preliminary variation performance one change before the target variation of the look-ahead SP reach performance to the variation performance that becomes the target variation. Therefore, it becomes easier to show a plurality of fluctuating performances as one fluctuating performance, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance that is the target variation of the look-ahead SP reach performance, the performance symbol 70a only in the central variable display area is displayed in a variable manner so that the SP reach performance is started without going through the normal reach performance. There is. Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display of all the effect symbols 70a is started, it becomes easier to show multiple variable effects as one variable effect, improving the effect of the look-ahead reach effect and increasing the interest of the game. becomes possible.

Note that the first pending icon display area 70B and the pending icon are displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, but the first pending icon display area 70B and the pending icon are displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect. It may be hidden and the first pending icon display area 70B and the pending icon may be redisplayed after the eye-catching effect is executed, or when the SP reach effect related to the pre-reading reach effect is executed, the SP reach effect may be hidden. The first pending icon display area 70B and the pending icon are displayed while the performance is being executed, and when a SP ready-to-read performance that is not related to the pre-read SP ready-to-read performance is executed, the first pending icon display area 70B and the pending icon are displayed during the performance. The hold icon display area 70B and the hold icon may be hidden.

(Example 2 of effect when pre-reading reach effect is executed)
A production example 2 when a pre-read reach production is executed will be described using FIGS. 58 and 59. Here, it is assumed that the pre-read ready-to-read effect is executed over three variable effects according to the pre-read ready-to-read effect scenario 03.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1) based on the normal variable performance pattern is being executed. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port A45 and the first reservation number becomes "2", the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "2" and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. An animation of increasing the pending icon (here, the pending icon that is the target of the look-ahead reach effect) is executed in the section.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the combination of performance symbols 70a including the "3" production symbol 70a in the center and left side is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the next With the start of the variable performance, a skill performance related to a look-ahead zone performance (a type of expected performance) is executed, and a zone performance is executed. Specifically, by wrapping the effect image around the number "3" in the production pattern 70a, it is suggested that a specific combination of production symbols (here, "X33") has been obtained.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(c), when a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1) that is a pre-variation two variations before the look-ahead reach performance is started, the “3” In connection with the movement of the character of the production pattern 70a, a skill activation image ("3" (zone) skill activation) is displayed and a voice saying "skill activation" is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a zone effect (display of zone image ZG and zone background image, output of zone BGM) is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(d), when the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the reach number is displayed, the skill effect related to the timer effect is executed and the timer effect is executed. The performance is activated. Specifically, by wrapping the effect image around the number of the "5" production pattern 70a, it is suggested that a specific combination of production symbols has been created, and the character of the "5" production pattern 70a will move. Relatedly, a skill activation image (“5” (change) skill activation) is displayed and a voice saying “skill activation” is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a timer image TM indicating "5 seconds" is displayed.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 1 special symbol TZ1 is stopped and displayed, and the icon TI is deleted. At this time, the number of seconds on the timer image TM indicates "1 second".

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(f), the variation effect (the effect pattern 70a in the center variation display area and the first special pattern TZ1) that is a pre-variation one change before the pre-read SP reach effect is displayed. At the same time, the pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, when 5 seconds have passed since the timer image was displayed, the number of seconds on the timer image TM becomes "0 seconds", and as shown in FIG. 59(g), the confrontation SP whose execution timing is suggested by the timer effect The first half of the reach performance is started and the timer image TM is erased.

In addition, in the first half of the confrontation SP reach performance, as shown in FIG. 59(h), a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character perform a slashing attack is performed, and after a variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(i). As shown, the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 are stopped and displayed when the reach is missed, and the icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(j), the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol TZ1) that is the relevant fluctuation of the look-ahead SP reach performance is started, and the first pending icon is displayed. The blue icon displayed in the area 70B is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and changes to a red icon. In addition, a development performance to the second half performance of the confrontation SP reach performance is executed. Specifically, the second half development symbol (the "next game" symbol) is displayed in the central variable display area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59(k), the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the character image "It's coming!", which suggests the execution of the second half of the showdown SP reach effect, appears. As shown in FIG. 59(l), an effect is performed in which an ally character and an enemy character perform a slashing attack.

Furthermore, when the final stage of the second half of the showdown SP reach performance comes, a cut-in performance is executed as shown in FIG. 59(m). Specifically, a cut-in image CI including a character is displayed, and a sound saying "Chance to win!" is output along with a cut-in sound effect.

When the execution period of the cut-in effect ends, as shown in FIG. 59(n), the cut-in effect is temporarily stopped in a state where the effect symbols 70a of "5" are aligned. Then, when the eye-catching performance is executed and the temporary stop time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot game performance is started, as shown in FIG. 59(o).

In addition, in the case of the look-ahead reach effect scenario 13 in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, the development effect to the SPSP reach effect is executed after the effect pattern 70a that results in a reach loss result in FIG. 59(n) is temporarily stopped. The first pending icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C become non-display, and the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and at the same time, the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is started. After that, the effect pattern 70a that results in a reach loss or jackpot outcome is temporarily stopped, an eye-catching effect is executed, the first pending icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the temporary stop time is When the period has elapsed, the performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed, and the jackpot game performance is started.

In this way, in the advance variation performance that is two variations before the target variation of the look-ahead SP reach performance, the SP symbol that makes it appear that the performance will continue to the next variation performance is stopped and displayed, and at the start of the relevant variation performance of the look-ahead SP reach performance. Only the central variable display area is changed again to start the SP reach effect. Therefore, it becomes easier to show a plurality of fluctuating performances as one fluctuating performance, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance and improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is possible to execute a timer performance, which is a type of expected performance, from a preliminary variation performance two variations before the target variation of the look-ahead SP reach performance to the variation performance that becomes the target variation. Therefore, it becomes easier to show a plurality of fluctuating performances as one fluctuating performance, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variation performance that is a preliminary variation one change before the target variation of the look-ahead SP reach production, the production pattern 70a of only the central variation display area is changed so that the SP reach production is started without going through the normal reach production. It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display of all the effect symbols 70a is started, it becomes easier to show multiple variable effects as one variable effect, improving the effect of the look-ahead reach effect and increasing the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, in the variable performance that is the target variation of the pre-read SP reach performance, the performance symbol 70a only in the central variable display area is displayed in a variable manner so that the second half of the SP reach performance is started without going through the normal reach performance. It has become. Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display of all the effect symbols 70a is started, it becomes easier to show multiple variable effects as one variable effect, improving the effect of the look-ahead reach effect and increasing the interest of the game. becomes possible.

(Example of production when transitioning from challenge mode to return mode)
An example of the performance when transitioning from the challenge mode (first time-saving game state) to the returning home mode (fourth time-saving game state) will be explained using FIGS. 60 and 61.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), when the ending of the first jackpot game starts, a right-handed small image MG1 is displayed during the round game, and a series of advantageous periods (the advantageous period continues from the so-called first win). While the number of balls acquired (KT) and the number of jackpots (AK) are displayed, a challenge mode entry effect (transition effect) indicating that the player will enter the challenge mode (first time-saving game state) is performed, and the player's An alert notification is executed to call attention. Specifically, a text image saying "Challenge Mode Entered" is displayed, and a storage medium (the balance of valuables owned by the player) from the lending device that communicates with the gaming machine 1 to lend game balls is displayed. A forgetting caution image TG for suppressing forgetting to take out an identifiable card, etc.) is displayed.

Thereafter, when the display period of the forget-to-take caution image TG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A large right-handed image MG2 is displayed for storing pending memory.

Then, after the ending period has passed and the challenge mode entry performance (transition performance) has ended, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second pending number (U2) increases to "1", and immediately after When the number of 2 reservations (U2) is subtracted to "0", as shown in FIG. 60(c), as the variable display of the second special symbol starts, only the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed in a variable manner. is started, and a challenge production that can be executed over multiple variable productions (until the end of the variable display of the second special symbol executed with the remainder of the second pending number (U2) when the first time-saving game state ends) will be started. Specifically, by maintaining the first time saving game state until the end of this variable performance, it is possible to increase the second pending number (U2) by landing the game ball in the second starting port 47. 2 pending number (U2) is accumulated, the time limit GG countdown (initial value is 20 seconds) is started until the transition to the challenge result presentation, and 4 pieces corresponding to the upper limit of the 2nd pending number (U2) are started. The panel icon is displayed in an inactive state (non-notification mode).

When one game ball enters the second starting port 47 in this state, as shown in FIG. It is displayed in an active manner (displayed in a notification manner) in a manner that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit). Specifically, depending on the look-ahead result of the second pending number (U2), 1 to 4 star marks are displayed on the panel icon depending on the expectation level (the higher the number of star marks, the higher the expectation level). high, but displayed with lower expectations than actual expectations at the initial display stage).

Furthermore, when three game balls enter the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. It is actively displayed in a manner that suggests the degree of expectation of a small win or a big win.

After that, if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 before the time limit GG elapses, the second pending number (U2) does not increase and overflows, but as shown in FIG. 60(f), the active display A promotion effect is performed for the panel icon IC currently displayed. Specifically, if you win the promotion lottery that is held every time a game ball enters the second starting port 47, an effect is performed on the panel icon IC that was actively displayed, and the actual image is wrapped in an effect image. A production will be performed in which the number of star marks increases according to the level of expectation. On the other hand, if the promotion lottery is unsuccessful, an action effect is performed on the panel icon IC that was actively displayed, but an effect is performed in which the number of star marks is maintained.

Then, when the time limit GG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60(g), the effect button 17 is operated for the number of variable effects to notify the result, and the result is notified by operating the effect button 17 or by elapse of the effective time. The challenge result presentation to be announced begins. Specifically, in the variable performance corresponding to the first variable display of the second special symbol, the performance symbol 70a that has formed the ready-to-reach state is displayed, and an operation promotion image SG (performance button image) that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 is displayed. +Remaining valid time image) is displayed.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A failure effect that stops and displays is performed, and when the variable time elapses, the second special symbol stops and displays as a special loss special symbol, and the second special symbol TZ2 shows a special loss result ("505" including "0" in the middle symbol). ”) to stop displaying. At this time, the first time-saving game state ends when the stop display of the second special symbol starts, and when the stop time elapses, it shifts to the fourth time-saving game state, but at this point, the returning home mode corresponds to the fourth time-saving game state. The return-to-home mode entry effect (transition effect) that suggests that this will happen is not executed.

In addition, if the second pending number (U2) remains when the first time saving game state (Special 2 time saving) is transferred (switched) to the fourth time saving gaming state (Special 1 time saving), the 4th time saving Even if the game state (Special 1 Time Saving) is entered, the remaining time saving count ZK is not displayed. In addition, even when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, the time-saving game state that requires right-hand hitting continues, so the right-hand hitting small image MG1 continues (stickerless). ) will be displayed.

Furthermore, when the variable display corresponding to the first variable display of the second special symbol among the remaining number of reserved second special symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 60(i), a display that has formed a reach state The symbol 70a is displayed and the sudden reach effect is started, and the active display of the first panel icon IC1 changes to the operation promotion image SG, and a star mark is displayed next to it.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60(j), a text image saying "Unfortunate..." is displayed and the effect pattern 70a, which is a losing result, is temporarily displayed. A failure effect that stops and displays is performed, and when the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol stops and displays as a special loss special symbol, and the second special symbol TZ2 shows a special loss result ("606" containing "0" in the middle symbol). ”) to stop displaying. At this time, the fourth time-saving game state ends when the stop display of the second special symbol starts (the normal game state starts), and when the stop time elapses, the fourth time-saving game state returns, but at this point, the fourth time-saving game state ends. A return-to-home mode entry effect (transition effect) indicating a return-to-home mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state is not executed. In addition, even when transitioning from the fourth time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, the time-saving game state that requires right-hand hitting continues, so the right-hand hitting small image MG1 continues (seamlessly). )Is displayed.

After that, in the variable presentation corresponding to the second to fourth variable display of the second special symbol among the remaining number of second special symbols, as shown in FIGS. 61(k) to 61(m), the figure 60(i) to 60(h), the same effect (transition of gaming state) is performed.

In addition, in the variable performance corresponding to the fourth variable display of the second special symbol among the remaining number of second special symbols, as shown in FIG. A result display is performed to show the result of the game (a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues from the so-called first win). Specifically, a text image of "BONUS x 1" indicating the number of jackpot games, "300pt" indicating the number of prize balls paid out, and a notice of transition to return home mode (4th time-saving gaming state). ``NEXT Return home mode'' will be displayed.

Further, when the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a special losing special symbol, and the second special symbol TZ2 is stopped and displayed as a special losing number ("606" including "0" in the middle symbol). At this time, the fourth time-saving game state ends (the normal game state starts) when the stop display of the second special symbol starts, and when the stop time elapses, the fourth time-saving game state (returning home mode) is entered again.

After that, when the second pending number (U2) is "0" and the variable production corresponding to the normal loss variation display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 61(p), the production symbol 70a and At the same time as the variable display of the first special symbol TZ1 is started, the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are re-displayed, and the returning home mode suggests a transition to the returning home mode (fourth time-saving game state). A rush performance (transition performance) is executed. At this time, the remaining number of time reductions ZK corresponding to the number of special 1 time reductions (J1) is displayed as "50 remaining", which means that a series of advantageous periods advantageous to the player are continuing, so the number of balls acquired KT and The number of jackpots AK remains displayed.

Then, when a variable time period elapses after three game balls enter the first starting hole B46, as shown in FIG. The icon TI is stopped and displayed, and the icon TI is deleted.

Furthermore, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 61(r), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 is started, and each pending icon is shifted and displayed, one icon TI is displayed, and the remaining time saving number ZK is updated from "49 times remaining" to "48 times remaining".

Then, when a variable time period elapses after two game balls enter the first starting hole B46, as shown in FIG. The icon TI is stopped and displayed, and the icon TI is deleted.

In addition, the timing before the start of the fluctuating performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (for example, at the start of the second special symbol's stop time, in the middle of the second special symbol's stop time, the second special symbol's After the stop time has elapsed (at the start of the customer waiting state, etc.), the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, suggesting a transition to the return home mode (fourth time-saving game state). A return-to-home mode entering effect (transition effect) may be executed. In addition, in this case, the remaining time reduction count ZK "50 times remaining" is displayed at the start timing of the returning home mode entry effect (transition effect), and when the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is started. The remaining time saving number ZK may be updated to "49 times".

Also, when transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state, the return home mode is set and the return home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed, but in this case, the acquired ball is not passed through the jackpot game. The number KT and the number of jackpots AK are not displayed, but an image saying "Help time in progress" indicating the second time-saving gaming state is displayed.

In addition, a star mark was used in the panel icon to indicate the degree of expectation that the result would be advantageous to the player, but the color of the panel icon (for example, the order of the degree of expectation is blue < green < red < rainbow) You can use stars to indicate expectations, or you can use both stars and colors (one star for blue panels, two stars for green panels, three stars for red panels, and three stars for rainbow panels). 4, etc.) may indicate the level of expectation.

In this way, the same right-handed hit notification can be executed in the challenge mode (Special 2 time saving) and the return home mode (Special 1 time saved) that is controlled after the end of the challenge mode. Specifically, the right-handed hit small image MG1 can be displayed continuously. Therefore, even if the performance mode (gaming state) is switched, the player can easily recognize the right-handed hit notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the challenge mode (Special 2 time saving) and the return home mode (Special 1 time saving) which is controlled after the end of the challenge mode, the number of pitches KT acquired during a series of advantageous periods is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the production mode (gaming state) is switched, it is possible to easily recognize that the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the challenge mode (Special 2 time saving) and the return home mode (Special 1 time saving) which is controlled after the end of the challenge mode, the number of jackpots AK in a series of advantageous periods is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the production mode (gaming state) is switched, it is possible to easily recognize that the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second special symbol is a special loss special symbol (stop special symbol data "31"), the second special symbol TZ2 is a special loss result ("505" or "606" including "0"). '', etc.), but if the production pattern 70a is the same as the second special pattern TZ2 (such as ``505'' or ``606'', which includes ``0'' in the middle pattern), it will be stopped and displayed. Even if the second special symbol is a special losing special symbol (stop special symbol data "31") is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed as the production symbol 70a. The display may be stopped at the same normal losing number (the number whose middle symbol does not include "0").

(Example of production when a jackpot game that shifts to legend mode A is executed)
With reference to FIG. 62, an example of performance when a jackpot game that shifts to the legend mode A (first time-saving game state) is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), during the challenge presentation in the challenge mode, a variable presentation corresponding to the fourth (last) variable display of the second special symbol among the remaining number of second special symbols held is started. When this happens, the effect pattern 70a that forms the reach state with "7" is displayed, and the sudden "7" reach effect starts, and the fourth panel icon IC4 changes to the operation promotion image SG, and the star mark appears. displayed next to it.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time elapses, the first movable member 73a operates and the success effect image SED is displayed around the first movable member 73a, as shown in FIG. 62(b). At the same time, a success performance (determined success performance) is performed in which the sound effect of "Kyuin Kyuin" is output.

After that, when the successful performance ends, as shown in FIG. 62(c), the "777" performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, and the message "LEGEND MODE GET!" indicates that the conditions for transition to the legend mode have been met. The character image is displayed.

Further, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the production pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 stop displaying at "777", and a character image of "Legend mode GET!" is displayed. However, the "V stock" indicates that the player has acquired two rights that will result in an advantageous result (big win or small win) (there is a strong possibility that the player will have an advantageous result two more times). ×2” character image is displayed.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 62(e), the opening performance of the fourth jackpot game is started, and the right-hitting image MG3 is additionally displayed. Specifically, a text image of "Legendary BONUS" is displayed, and a V stock display indicating the number of times that a result (big win or small win) that is advantageous to the player is virtually guaranteed (confirmed). A VST (here, an active display with two "V" characters displayed in yellow) is performed. In addition, the round display RU for notifying the progress status of round games of jackpot games is displayed inactive (10 circle marks corresponding to 10 round games are displayed in white), and A count display CU for notifying the status of winnings in the winning opening is inactively displayed (10 round marks corresponding to the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening in one round are displayed in white).

After that, when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the execution condition for executing multiple round games in the jackpot game is established, and the first round game is started, as shown in FIG. 62(f). As shown in , the round effect is started, and the first (leftmost) circle mark of the round display RU switches from inactive (non-notification mode) to red active display (notification mode). Moreover, when one game ball enters the big winning hole, as shown in FIG. 62(g), the first (left end) circle mark of the count display CU changes from white inactive to red active display.

In addition, when 10 game balls enter the big prize opening in the first round game, as shown in FIG. mode) to a red active display (notification mode), and an interval effect is started. At this time, when the 11th game ball that exceeds the big winning number of 10 enters the big winning hole (over winning occurs), the count display CU will show 10 circle marks as shown in FIG. 62(i). remains actively displayed (the 11th and subsequent circles are not additionally displayed), and an over winning sound is output. The over winning sound output here is output up to the second over winning, but is not output from the third over winning.

After that, when the second round game starts, the round effect starts as shown in FIG. 62(j), and the second round mark (second from the left) of the round display RU becomes white (non-notification mode) to red active display (notification mode), and all the round marks on the count display CU switch from active display (non-notification mode) to inactive display (notification mode). From then on, each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the round mark on the count display CU will be switched to the active display in order, and as the round game progresses, the display will be the same as in Figures 62(f) to 62(j). The production progresses.

In addition, although the inactive display of the round display RU and count display CU, which are commonly displayed regardless of the type of jackpot game, is white, it may be displayed in gray or with only an outline, or the round display RU and count display Although the active display of the CU is shown in red, it may also be displayed in yellow or pink.

In addition, although the active display of the V character in the V stock display VST is shown in yellow, it may also be displayed in gold or red.Although the inactive display in the V stock display VST is shown in gray, it may be displayed in white or only an outline.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game is executed, the round display RU and count display CU may be displayed inactive from the start of the opening, or the round display RU may be displayed inactive from the start of the opening. It may be displayed in an active manner.

In this way, it has a first specific display area (round mark for round display RU) that displays first specific information (round display RU) in response to the execution of a jackpot game, and has a first specific display area (circle mark for round display RU), and has a first specific display area (round mark for round display RU) in which a predetermined condition is met ( The first specific display area can be switched from an inactive display (white: non-notifying mode) to an active display (red: notifying mode) based on the start of a round game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it has a second specific display area (circle mark for count display CU) that displays second specific information (count display CU) in response to the execution of a jackpot game, and has a second specific display area (circle mark for count display CU) in which a predetermined condition is met (big win The second specific display area can be switched from an inactive display (white color) to an active display (red color) based on the amount of winnings (in the winning position). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second specific display area (round mark for count display CU) will be changed to inactive display (white) when the next round game is executed, and the predetermined condition will be met again (when the big winning opening is reached). When a winning (winning) is achieved, the inactive display (white) is switched to the active display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if an over-win occurs during a round game, the over-win sound is output without increasing the number of the second specific display area (circle mark). Therefore, without giving the player the impression that the maximum number of winnings in a round game has increased (changed), the player can be made aware of the occurrence of over-winning, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, as a specific winning special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") among the plurality of winning special symbols is stopped and displayed, the "7" production symbol 70a is aligned and shifts to the legendary mode. In this case, a V stock display is executed to indicate the number of times that it is substantially guaranteed (confirmed) that the variable performance will result in an advantageous result for the player (big win or small win). Therefore, it is possible to effectively stimulate the joy of the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the V stock display, the number of times (two V) that it is substantially guaranteed (confirmed) that the variable performance will result in an advantageous result for the player (big win or small win) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of times that the result will be advantageous to the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when a small winning game is executed in legend mode A)
An example of performance when a small winning game is executed in the legend mode A (first time saving game state) will be explained using FIGS. 63 and 64.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), when the ending of the fourth jackpot game starts, the right-handed small image MG1 and the V stock display VST (here, the two "V" characters are yellow) are displayed during the round game. The active display (displayed in ), the number of balls acquired KT and the number of jackpots AK during the above-mentioned series of advantageous periods are displayed, and the legend mode A enters, indicating that the legend mode A (first time-saving gaming state) will be entered. At the same time as a performance (transition performance) is performed, an alert notification is performed to call the player's attention. Specifically, the character image "Legend Mode A Entered" is displayed, and the above-mentioned forget-to-take caution image TG is displayed.

Thereafter, when the display period of the forgetting caution image TG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the above-mentioned immersion caution image NG is displayed and the V stock display VST is continued.

Then, when the ending period has passed, as shown in FIG. 63(c), the legend mode A entry effect ends and the remaining time reduction number ZK corresponding to the special 2 time reduction number (J2) is displayed as "100 remaining". Ru. Further, although the variable display of the first special symbol is started, a variable effect is started in which the first special symbol TZ1 is displayed in a variable manner without the effect pattern 70a being displayed in a variable manner. Then, when a variable time period elapses after three game balls enter the second starting port 47, the first special symbol TZ1 stops and displays a losing number ("438") as shown in FIG. 63(d). .

Further, when the stop time has elapsed and the special loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. Then, each icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed, and one of the icons is displayed as the icon TI.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 63(f), the production pattern 70a stops displaying at a losing number ("619"), and the second special symbol TZ2 stops displaying at a special losing number ("619"). The icon TI is stopped and displayed at "609" (including "0"), the icon TI is deleted, and the remaining time saving number ZK is updated from "100 times remaining" to "99 times remaining".

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the small hit fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. , the icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed, and one of them is displayed as the icon TI.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, a countdown display with a starting value of "3" (a timer different from the look-ahead countdown effect) is displayed as shown in FIGS. 63(h) to 63(j). performance) is executed.

Furthermore, when the countdown display reaches "0", a preparation confirmation display (character image + "Are you ready?" text image) is performed as shown in FIG. 64(k), and as shown in FIG. 64(l). As such, the first V stock consumption effect is executed. Specifically, the active display character "V" located at the top of the V stock display VST moves to the center of the screen and changes to an operation promotion image (direction button image + remaining valid time image), and the V stock display The "V" character located above the VST is displayed in gray and inactive.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time elapses, the first movable member 73a operates and the success effect image SED is displayed around the first movable member 73a, as shown in FIG. 64(m). At the same time, a success performance (determined success performance) is performed in which the sound effect of "Kyuin Kyuin" is output.

After that, when the successful presentation ends, the production symbol 70a of "555", which will be a hit, will temporarily stop, and after the variable time has passed, the production of "555", which will be a hit, will be produced, as shown in FIG. 64(n). The symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol TZ2 is stopped and displayed at the small winning number ("5V5" including "V" in the middle symbol), and the icon TI is erased. Additionally, a text image "Legend mode continues!" indicating that Legend mode will continue is displayed.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 64(o), the opening performance of the small winning game is started and the right-hitting image MG3 is additionally displayed. Specifically, the text image "Continuation BONUS" indicating that the legendary mode will continue is displayed, but at this point it is not confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, so the round display RU and count display CU is not displayed.

After that, when the opening/closing game in the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 64(p), when the game ball is passed through the regular gate 44, the V jackpot game (second round game) is started. The instruction image SZ for notifying is displayed inactive (displayed in a non-notifying manner).

After that, when the opening/closing game of the small winning game ends after the game ball that entered the first big prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53, the game ball passes through the general gate 44 as shown in FIG. 64(q). When this is done, an instruction image SZ notifying that the V jackpot game (second round game) is to be started is actively displayed (displayed in a notification mode). Then, when the game ball passes through the general game gate 44, as shown in FIG. 64(q), the instruction image SZ changes to the display of "Started" and the first round game and round performance are started. A round display RU and a count display CU are displayed. At this time, the two circle marks from the left end of the round display RU are actively displayed, and the other circle marks are displayed inactive.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large prize opening 50 during the small winning game (small winning puncture), as shown in FIG. 64(s), the small winning game The ending performance is performed. Specifically, a text image saying "End..." is displayed, and "NEXT Legend Mode B" which foretells the transition to Legend Mode B is displayed.

Then, when the ending time of the small winning game has passed and the variable display of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. , the remaining time saving number ZK corresponding to the special 2 time saving number (J2) in the first time saving game state is redisplayed as "98 remaining times". In addition, variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 is started, and each pending icon HI is shifted and displayed, and one is displayed as the relevant icon TI. At this time, the legend mode B entry effect indicating that the legend mode B will be entered is not executed.

In addition, if the opening/closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first big prize opening 50 during the small winning game (small winning puncture), the V stock display may be erased. , instead of setting the legend mode B, the rush mode may be set. In addition, the remaining time saving number ZK corresponding to the special 2 time saving number (J2) in the first time saving game state may be deleted, or in a mode where the special 2 time saving number (J2) is unknown, such as "?? times". May be displayed.

In addition, here, we have explained the case where the small winning game is executed in the legend mode A after the performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned and the jackpot game is executed, but the small winning game changes from the small winning game to the jackpot game during the time saving game state. If this is executed, the flow of effects will basically be the same (display of instruction image SZ, round display RU, count display CU, etc.) except that V stock display VST is not displayed.

In this way, when a specific winning special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") among the plurality of winning special symbols is stopped and displayed, and the production symbols 70a of "7" are aligned. , it is possible to execute a V stock display (display specific information) indicating the number of times that it is virtually guaranteed (confirmed) that the variable performance will result in an advantageous result for the player (big hit or small win), and the V stock display When a variable performance that makes it possible to execute a jackpot game in a time-saving gaming state where ) It is possible to perform a V stock consumption effect that suggests that. Therefore, it is possible to improve the subsequent performance effect due to the alignment of specific performance symbols, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, each time a fluctuating performance (big hit fluctuating performance, small winning fluctuating performance) that results in an advantageous result for the player is executed, one V display (multiple specific information One of these is used to perform the V stock consumption effect. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of times that a result advantageous to the player (big win or small win) is substantially guaranteed (confirmed), and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, among the V stock displays (specific information displays), the V display (specific information) in which the V stock consumption effect has been executed is switched from an active display to an inactive display. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of times that a result advantageous to the player (big win or small win) is substantially guaranteed (confirmed), and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, before the V stock exhaustion effect is executed, a countdown display that suggests the execution of the V stock exhaustion effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the V stock consumption performance and to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the finger has a third specific display area (display area of instruction image SZ) that displays third specific information (display of instruction image SZ) in response to the execution of a jackpot game, and has a finger third specific display area (display area of instruction image SZ) that indicates that a predetermined condition is satisfied ( The third specific display area can be switched from inactive display (non-notification mode) to active display (notification mode) based on the transition to a state where the round game starts when the game ball passes through the game ball gate 44. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when a small winning game is executed in legend mode B but there is a puncture)
With reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, an example of a performance in the case where a small winning game is executed in the legend mode B but it is punctured (the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the jackpot game is not executed) will be described.

First, when the ending of various V jackpot games starts, the right hit small image MG1, the V stock display VST (here, the active display of two "V" letters in yellow and the gray one) are displayed during the round game. (inactive display), and a legend mode A entry effect (transition) that suggests entering legend mode B (first time-saving gaming state) while the number of balls acquired KT and the number of jackpots AK during the above-mentioned series of advantageous periods are displayed. At the same time, an alert notification is executed to draw the attention of the players. Specifically, the character image "Legend Mode B Entered" is displayed, and the above-mentioned forget-to-take caution image TG is displayed.

Thereafter, when the display period of the forget-to-take caution image TG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the above-mentioned immersion caution image NG is displayed, and the V stock display continues.

Then, when the ending period has elapsed, the legend mode B entry performance ends and the remaining time reduction number ZK corresponding to the special 2 time reduction number (J2) is displayed as "100 remaining times". Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 65(b), a variable effect in which the effect pattern 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 are displayed in a variable manner starts, and the second pending icon display area The icons displayed on 70D are shifted and displayed, and one of them is displayed as the icon TI.

After that, when the first special loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol in Legend Mode B ends and the second small win fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts, after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A countdown display with a starting value of "3" is executed, and when the countdown display reaches "0", the above-mentioned preparation confirmation display is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the second V stock consumption effect is executed. Specifically, the active display character "V" located at the bottom of the V stock display VST moves to the center of the screen and changes to an operation promotion image (direction button image + remaining valid time image), and the V stock The "V" character located at the bottom of the display VST is displayed in gray and inactive.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time elapses, the first movable member 73a operates and the success effect image SED is displayed around the first movable member 73a, as shown in FIG. 65(d). At the same time, a success performance (determined success performance) is performed in which the sound effect of "Kyuin Kyuin" is output.

After that, when the successful performance ends, the performance symbol 70a of "555" which becomes a winning result temporarily stops, and when a variable time elapses, the normal game state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 65(e), the winning result and the The production symbol 70a of "555" is stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol TZ2 is stopped and displayed at the small winning number ("5V5" including "V" in the middle symbol), and the icon TI is erased. In addition, a text image "Legend mode ends!" indicating that the legend mode ends is displayed.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 65(f), the opening performance of the small winning game is started and the right-hitting image MG3 is additionally displayed. Specifically, a character image saying "Rush BONUS" is displayed to indicate the transition to rush mode, but at this point it is not confirmed that a jackpot game will be played, so the round display RU and count display are CU is not displayed.

In addition, if the opening/closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large prize opening 50 during the small winning game (small winning puncture), as shown in FIG. 65(g), the small winning game The ending performance is performed. Specifically, the character image "End..." is displayed, and the "NEXT return home mode" is displayed, which foretells that the transition to the return home mode (fourth time-saving gaming state) will be made depending on the remaining second pending number (U2). " is displayed.

Then, when the ending time of the small winning game has elapsed and the variable display of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. A special loss variable display of the second special symbol TZ2 is started, and a variable effect in which only the second special symbol TZ2 is variable and displayed is started.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol TZ2 stops and displays a special losing result ("505" including "0" in the middle symbol), as shown in FIG. 65(i), and the stop time has elapsed. Then, the state shifts to the 4th time saving game state (Special 1 time saving), but as shown in FIG. 66 (j), the special loss fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol starts while the ending effect continues, and the 2nd special symbol TZ2 A fluctuating effect in which only the characters are displayed in a fluctuating manner is started.

In addition, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(k), the second special symbol TZ2 stops and displays a special losing result ("505" including "0" in the middle symbol), and temporarily returns to the normal gaming state. to move to. Then, when the stop time elapses, the state shifts to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving), but as shown in FIG. A special loss variable display is started, and a variable effect in which only the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed in a variable manner is started.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(m), the second special symbol TZ2 stops displaying at a special losing number ("606" including "0" in the middle symbol), and temporarily returns to the normal game state. to move to. Then, when the stop time has passed, the mode shifts to the 4th time-saving game state (Special 1st time-saving game state), and since the second pending number (U2) has become "0" at this point, it becomes the return home mode (4th time-saving game state). A return-to-home mode entry effect (transition effect) indicating that the return to home mode will occur is executed. Specifically, a text image that reads "Enter homecoming mode" is displayed. In addition, the remaining number of time reductions ZK corresponding to the number of special 1 time reductions (J1) is displayed as "50 remaining", which means that a series of advantageous periods that are advantageous to the player are continuing, so the number of balls acquired KT and the jackpot The number of times AK remains displayed.

In addition, at the time when the opening/closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large winning opening 50 during the small winning game (small winning puncture) and the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) ends. If the second pending number (U2) is 0, basically it does not shift to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving), so the return home mode entry effect (transition effect) is not executed, and the first time-saving game If the second pending number (U2) is "1" or "2" when the state (special 2 time saving) ends, the execution will be executed when the second pending number (U2) becomes "0". When the special loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol stops, a return home mode entry performance (transition performance) is executed.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing game of the small winning game ends after the game ball that entered the first large prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game in FIG. The effect shown in is executed and the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 64(q).

In addition, if the second pending number (U2) does not exist at the time when the opening/closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first big winning opening 50 (small winning puncture) during the small winning game, The ending effect of the small winning game is executed without displaying the "NEXT returning home mode" that foretells the transition to the returning home mode (4th time saving game state), and after the ending time has passed, the mode transition effect is not executed and the normal effect mode Move to A.

Here, we have shown an example in which the first time-saving game state (Special 2 time-saving) is ended due to the occurrence of a small hit puncture, and then the fourth time-saving game state (Special 1 time-saving) is controlled. J1) or special 2 time saving number (J2) becomes "0" and the first time saving game state (special 2 time saving) ends, basically, the second pending number (U2) is "0". When the special loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was executed when the second special symbol is stopped, a return-to-home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed.

In addition, when the second special symbol TZ2 was stopped and displayed with a special loss result (“606” including “0” in the middle symbol), the return home mode entry effect (transition effect) was to be executed, but the next The returning home mode entry effect (transition effect) may be executed when the variable effect (the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol) is started, or the first time saving effect may be executed after the first time-saving game state ends. When the game is controlled to the fourth time-saving game state, a return-to-home mode entering effect (transition effect) may be executed.

In this way, if the jackpot game or the variable display of special symbols is not executed after the first time-saving game state is finished, and the fourth time-saving game state is controlled, the return home mode (fourth time-saving game state) is entered. Execution of the returning home mode entry effect (transition effect) that suggests the return to home mode is restricted (it is executed if the second pending number U2 is "0" and the fourth time-saving game state is not controlled again, but the second pending If the number U2 is "1" or more and there is a possibility that the game will be controlled to the fourth time-saving game state again, the game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the jackpot game or the variable display of special symbols is not executed after the fourth time-saving game state is finished, and the fourth time-saving game state is controlled, it is suggested that the return home mode (fourth time-saving game state) will be entered. The return home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed only once. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the jackpot game or the variable display of special symbols is not executed after the end of the 4th time saving game state (Special 1 time saving), and the control is returned to the 4th time saving gaming state (Special 1 time saving), the previous 4th time saving game state (Special 1 time saving) In the game state (special 1 time saving) and the fourth time saving game state (special 1 time saving) that is controlled after the previous fourth time saving gaming state (special 1 time saving), the same right-handed hitting notification (right-handed hitting small image MG1) display) can be executed continuously. Therefore, even if the gaming state changes, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the right-handed hit notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the previous fourth time saving game state (Special 1 time saving) and the fourth time saving game state (Special 1 time saving) that is controlled after the previous 4th time saving gaming state (Special 1 time saving), the same right-handed notification (Display of right-handed small image MG1) can be executed continuously. Therefore, even if the performance mode (gaming state) is switched, the player can easily recognize the right-handed hit notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the previous 4th time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) and the 4th time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) that is controlled after the previous 4th time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving), acquisition in a series of advantageous periods is possible. The number of pitches KT is displayed continuously. Therefore, even if the production mode (gaming state) is switched, it is possible to easily recognize that the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the previous 4th time saving game state (Special 1 time saving) and the 4th time saving gaming state (Special 1 time saving) that is controlled after the previous 4th time saving gaming state (Special 1 time saving), you can win a jackpot in a series of advantageous periods. The number of times AK is displayed continuously. Therefore, even if the production mode (gaming state) is switched, it is possible to easily recognize that the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines are generally gaming machines that determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player. Among these gaming machines, there was one that determined whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and executed an effect according to the determination result ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-118109). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the second Acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port), and whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to play; a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination, and the special game includes a first special game and a second special game different from the first special game. The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (especially 1 time saving) in which the first acquisition condition is more easily met than the second acquisition condition, and the second acquisition condition is more likely than the first acquisition condition. a second specific gaming state (special 2 time saving) in which the above is likely to be established, and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling to the first specific gaming state after the end of the first special game; After the game ends, the second specific game state can be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the second Acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port), and whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to play; a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination; 1 specific gaming state (Special 1 time saving) and a second specific gaming state (Special 2 working time saving) in which the second acquisition condition is more easily met than the first obtaining condition, and the gaming state control means It is possible to control to the second specific gaming state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game, and it is possible to control to the first specific gaming state without going through the special game after the end of the second specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the second Acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port), and whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to play; a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination; 1 specific gaming state (Special 1 time saving) and a second specific gaming state (Special 2 working time saving) in which the second acquisition condition is more easily met than the first obtaining condition, and the gaming state control means When the number of times it is determined that the special game is not to be executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the first specific game state can be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute any of a plurality of special games (big winning games) that are advantageous to the player, a winning device (big winning game) in which a specific area is provided inside the gaming machine is provided. an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information acquired by the acquisition means. a board 110), a specific game execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing a specific game (small winning game) that converts the award winning device from a closed state to an open state based on the result of the determination; A special game execution means (main control board 110) that can execute the special game based on winning of game media in the specific area during the game, and a special game execution means (main control board 110) that can execute the special game in a specific game state (time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state); and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a variable performance that variably displays a plurality of performance symbols based on the result of the determination, The end conditions for the specific game state include a first end condition that is satisfied when the predetermined game is played a first number of times, and a first end condition that is satisfied when the predetermined game is played a second number of times that is greater than the first number of times. a second termination condition that is satisfied when the specific game is played a third number of times, and a fourth termination condition that is satisfied when the specific game is played a fourth number of times that is greater than the third number of times. and the game state control means is configured to control the game state control means to control the game state after the end of the special game if the game medium enters the special area during the special game that is executed after the predetermined performance symbols are stopped and displayed. The game medium is controlled to be in the specific game state that ends when either the first ending condition or the third ending condition is satisfied, and the game medium is in the specific area during the specific game that is executed after a specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. If a prize is won, the game is controlled to the specific game state which ends when either the second end condition or the fourth end condition is satisfied after the end of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a winning device (big winning opening) in which a specific area is provided inside a gaming machine that can execute special games (big winning games) that are advantageous to players; acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a condition (ball entering the starting port); and determination means capable of determining the determination information acquired by the acquisition means. (main control board 110), a variable display execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing variable display of symbols based on the result of the determination, and based on the fact that the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display. a specific game execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing a specific game (small winning game) that converts the winning device from a closed state to an open state; A special game execution means (main control board 110) that can execute the special game based on winnings, and a game state control means that can control a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. (main control board 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination, and the end condition of the specific game state is that a predetermined game is played a first number of times. a first termination condition that is satisfied when the predetermined game is played (for example, once); and a second termination condition that is satisfied when the predetermined game is played a second number of times (for example, 100 times) that is greater than the first number of times. , the gaming state control means controls the normal gaming state when the gaming medium enters the prize in the specific area during the specific game, and controls the specific gaming state to end when the first ending condition is satisfied. If the specific game state is when a game medium enters the specific area during the specific game, control is made to the specific game state that ends when the second termination condition is met. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute any of a plurality of special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (ball enters the starting slot). an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the determination information; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. and a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a plurality of performance symbols are variably displayed based on the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance, and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (other than the legendary mode), a second specific gaming state (legendary mode), When a specific special game (fourth big win game, first V jackpot game via the first small win game) is executed among the plurality of special games, the game state control means controls the special game of the special game. After the end, control is possible to the second specific game state (legendary mode), and when the variable production in which the specific special game is executed, the production control means controls a specific production symbol in the variable production. can display a stop roll ("777"), and when the variable performance is executed in which the specific special game is executed in the first specific game state (other than the legendary mode), the specific special game is executed. The percentage (15%) in which a stop result ("777") is displayed based on the symbol, and the case where the variable effect in which the specific special game is executed in the second specific game state (legendary mode) is executed. , and the ratio (2%) of displaying the stop result ("777") according to the specific effect pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring (special figure determination information); a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; a suspension storage means (main control board 110) that stores the unexecuted determination information as a reservation memory; a preliminary determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination means; performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance based on the performance symbols based on the result of the above, and the performance executed during the variable performance includes a first specification that makes the execution of the special game expected. a performance (N reach), and a second specific performance (SP reach) that makes execution of the special game more expected than the first specific performance, and the performance control means, based on the result of the determination, In the variable performance, the second specific performance (SP reach) can be executed after the first specific performance (N reach), and if the second specific performance is executed with the suspended memory, the previous If it is determined before the article, execute the first specific effect (N reach) in the variable effect immediately before executing the second specific effect, and execute the first specific effect in the next variable effect. It is possible to execute the second specific effect (SP reach) without executing it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring (special figure determination information); a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; a suspension storage means (main control board 110) that stores the unexecuted determination information as a reservation memory; a preliminary determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination means; performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance based on the performance symbols based on the result of the above, and the performance executed during the variable performance includes a first specification that makes the execution of the special game expected. a performance (N reach), and a second specific performance (SP reach) that makes the execution of the special game more expected than the first specific performance, and the second specific performance includes a first period performance (SP reach). (first half performance) and a second period performance (SP reach second half performance) executed after the first period performance, and the performance control means, based on the result of the determination, in one of the variable performances, After executing the first specific effect, the first period effect of the second specific effect can be executed, and then the second period effect of the second specific effect can be executed, and in a state where the suspended memory exists. If it is determined in advance that the second specific effect is to be executed, in the variable effect immediately before executing the second specific effect, after executing the first specific effect, the first specific effect of the second specific effect is executed. A period performance (SP reach first half performance) is executed, and in the next variable performance, the first period performance (SP reach first half performance) of the first specific performance and the second specific performance is not executed, and the first period performance (SP reach first half performance) is executed. It is possible to execute the second period performance (SP reach second half performance) of the 2 specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a first starting area of the gaming medium (game ball) fired into the gaming area is provided. an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winnings in the first starting area (first starting opening) or the second starting area (second starting opening); A determining means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game, and a game state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a control board 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination, and in the specific game state, the first start area is lower than the second start area. A first specific gaming state (Special 1 time saving) in which it is easy for game media to win in the area, and a second specific gaming state (Special 2 time saving) in which it is easier to win the gaming medium in the second starting area than in the first starting area. , the game state control means is capable of controlling to the second specific game state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game, and after the end of the second specific game state, the game state is controlled to the second specific game state without going through the special game. The performance control means is capable of executing a firing suggestion notification (right-handed notification) that suggests a firing mode of the game medium during the specific gaming state, and the second specific gaming state is It is possible to execute the firing suggestion notification in the same manner (right-handed small image) in the state and the first specific gaming state that is controlled after the end of the second specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a first starting area of the gaming medium (game ball) fired into the gaming area is provided. an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winnings in the first starting area (first starting opening) or the second starting area (second starting opening); A determining means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game, and a game state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a control board 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination, and in the specific game state, the first start area is set higher than the second start area. The area includes a first specific gaming state (special time saving) in which game media are likely to win, and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the first specific gaming state for a predetermined period, and the first specific gaming state After the completion of the game, the control can be performed again to the first specific game state without going through the special game, and the performance control means may issue a firing suggestion notification (right-handed hit) that suggests a firing mode of the game medium during the specific game state. notification), and the suggestion notification is made in the same manner (right-handed small image) in the first specific gaming state and in the first specific gaming state that is controlled again after the end of the first specific gaming state. Can be executed continuously. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the second Acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port), and whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to play; a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result of the determination; 1 specific gaming state (special 1 time saving), and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the first specific gaming state for a predetermined period of time, and without going through the special game after the end of the first specific gaming state. can be controlled again to the first specific game state, and the performance control means can execute a transition performance (entering performance) indicating that the first specific game state will be controlled, and the first specific game state can be controlled again. When the state is controlled again to the first specific game state without going through the special game after the end of the state, the transition effect is executed only once. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute any of a plurality of special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (ball enters the starting hole). an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the determination information; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. and a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a plurality of performance symbols are variably displayed based on the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance, the game state control means being able to control to the specific game state (legendary mode) after the end of the special game, and the performance control means The means is capable of displaying a specific combination of performance symbols ("777") in the variable performance when the specific special game is executed; After the specific information (V stock display) can be displayed, and when the variable performance that makes it possible to execute the special game in the specific gaming state in which the specific information is displayed, the specific information It is possible to perform a specific performance (V stock consumption performance) using . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute any of a plurality of special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition (entering the first starting port) is set. an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a game; ), and a reservation storage means (main control board 110) that stores the determination information obtained when the second acquisition condition is met and the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory (second reservation); A game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that variably displays performance symbols based on the performance, and the performance control means is configured to perform a specific variation in which a predetermined special game (fourth jackpot game) is executed. When a performance is executed, a specific combination of performance symbols ("777") can be displayed in the variable performance, and the specific combination of performance symbols that is executed based on the second pending memory when the specific gaming state ends. When the variable performance satisfies a predetermined condition (the final hold of the second special symbol's remaining hold memory), displaying the specific combination of performance symbols ("777") in the specific variable performance is restricted. (Do not show). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, determination information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring special figure determination information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance in which a plurality of performance symbols are variably displayed based on the result, and the performance executed during the variable performance includes a first display of the plurality of performance symbols. a first performance (first skill performance) associated with the first combination, and a second performance (second skill performance) associated with the second combination of the plurality of performance symbols; The control means is capable of executing the first performance (first skill performance) when the performance symbols that are the first combination are displayed in the variable performance, and is capable of executing the first performance (first skill performance) when the performance symbols that are the first combination are displayed in the variable performance; When the effect pattern is displayed, the second effect (second skill effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, determination information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring special figure determination information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to the result, and the performance control means includes a specific display area (count display) for displaying information to the player during the special game. area, round display area), and when a predetermined condition is met (transition to a state in which a round game is started by passing a game ball to the general gate 44, start of a round game, etc.), the specific display can be controlled. Switch the area from the non-notification mode (inactive display: white) to the notification mode (active display, red). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (in parallel). The variable display of the special symbols may be performed in the order in which game balls enter the various first starting holes (first starting hole A45, first starting hole B46) and second starting hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed not to generate a variable probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the type of special jackpot symbol, the variable probability gaming state may be generated. In this case, in a specific round game (for example, the second round game or the final round game) during the jackpot game, the specific area 53 provided inside the first jackpot opening 50 is A process may be performed to generate a variable probability gaming state on the condition that the game ball has passed, or a variable display that produces a variable probability gaming state may be performed based on the gaming state when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 53. A process for determining the number of times may be performed.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on an active line (the awarding condition is met) by a game using medals (gaming media), a predetermined amount of The present invention can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (a so-called slot machine) that can award prize medals (prize medal data) to players. Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General gate 45 First starting port A
46 1st starting port B
47 Second starting opening 50 First big winning opening 56 Second big winning opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player and a specific game that converts a winning device having a specific area inside from a closed state to an open state,
an acquisition means capable of acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition or a second acquisition condition;
determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information;
a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of symbols based on the determination result of the determination means;
a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
A production control means capable of controlling production according to the result of the determination,
When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the specific game can be executed;
The special game can be executed based on winning of game media in the specific area during execution of the specific game,
The determining means is
determining that the special game will be executed with the same probability in the normal game state and the time-saving game state;
In the time-saving gaming state,
a first time-saving gaming state in which the first acquisition condition is more easily met than the second acquisition condition;
a second time-saving gaming state in which the second acquisition condition is more easily met than the first acquisition condition;
a third time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving gaming state and in which the second acquisition condition is more easily satisfied than the first acquisition condition;
The gaming state control means includes:
When it is determined to execute the specific game while being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state when the gaming medium enters the prize in the specific area during the execution of the specific game is the normal gaming state. , controllable to the second time-saving game state for a predetermined period in response to the end of the special game executed based on the winning prize;
After the end of the second time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state can be controlled without going through the special game,
When it is determined to execute the specific game while being controlled in the second time- saving gaming state, and the gaming state when the gaming medium enters the prize in the specific area during the execution of the specific game is the time-saving gaming state. . A gaming machine that can be controlled to the third time-saving gaming state in response to the end of the special game executed based on the winning.